User Manual Microwave Links

v e r s i o n 2.8.3

AT283_UMM_E2

Atoll User Manual

2

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Contact Information
Forsk (Head Office) 7 rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac France

    

www.forsk.com sales@forsk.com helpdesk@forsk.com +33 (0) 562 74 72 10 +33 (0) 562 74 72 25 +33 (0) 562 74 72 11 sales_us@forsk.com support_us@forsk.com +1 312 674 4846 +1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655) +1 312 674 4847 www.forsk.com.cn enquiries@forsk.com.cn +86 20 8553 8938 +86 20 8553 8285

Web Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Web Information and enquiries Telephone Fax

Forsk (USA Office) 200 South Wacker Drive Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60606 USA

   

Forsk (China Office) Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building, No.66 Jianzhong Road, Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone, Guangzhou, 510665, People’s Republic of China

   

Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual Release AT283_UMM_E2 © Copyright 1997 - 2010 by Forsk The software described in this document is provided under a license agreement and may only be used or copied under the terms and conditions of the license agreement. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form without prior authorisation from Forsk. The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective registering parties.

About the Atoll User Documentation
The Atoll user documentation is a guide and reference for users working with Atoll. Atoll is easy to use and offers a clear, self-explanatory user interface. The user documentation helps the user make effective and efficient use of all the features that Atoll offers. The user documentation aims to familiarise the user with the working environment of Atoll and enable him to use all of Atoll’s features and functions. The Atoll user documentation is technology-specific. For each Atoll radio technology, the Atoll user manual contains instructions and information specific to that technology as well as chapters describing the Atoll working environment and the tools available.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

3

Atoll User Manual

4

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

.........1 1.....................................................4.................. 35 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar......................1....4..2.4.....................................................3.4...............................4...............................2 1.............8................4 1...1 1.................................................. 20 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse ............4 1...................................................10 1...........................6 1.......................................1........................................................................................................ 14 The Explorer Window ................5 1..........3........ 39 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image ...........4.......................4.3...... 14 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window..................................4...........4 1......4.. 15 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs.........................................1 1...................6 1..... 34 Creating Polygons.................................... 16 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer..................................................3 1..................................1........................4 1........................................................3...... 26 Changing the Map Scale .................................2.........................4 1....................3.........................................................................2....................................1...4........ 35 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines ...............................................9...... 16 Working with Layers Using the Explorer ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 1.......................................... 30 Using a Focus Zone............ 19 Moving a Site to a Higher Location................................................................................12 © Forsk 2010 5 ............................... 16 Working with Objects .....9..4............... 13 Working with Document Windows ................................................... 27 Choosing a Scale.......1 1....................3 1............. 19 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse .... 36 Editing Contours................................................................... 17 Using the Object Context Menu ....... 39 Copying a Map to Another Application ..1 1............................................... 36 Editing a Point.4.......... Lines..........................................................................................................................9.......................................... 19 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse .......... 18 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links ............................. 21 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects ........... 28 Displaying Rulers Around the Map ............3.................................................................9............................2 1............................ 38 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions.............................................................3 1..............2 1..................4.........................................4....................................3................................6 1................4 1...........................2 1....8.........3....5 1............3 1.................2.....................................4..Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents...............1........... 17 Deleting an Object .....4..........1 1.....4...................................................................................................................................................................2..............4............................................................. 34 Adding a Vector Layer .............................. 13 The Atoll Work Area ..4........................................................... 25 Working with Maps.1..............................2......3 1.... 1 1...... 19 Moving a Site Using the Mouse ....4...............................4.................................4.........................................................4......1................................................................................................3 1..............6 1............................................................................ 27 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels.......................................1.............. 18 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map ..............3 1................................................ 15 Navigating in the Explorer Window ................................. 33 Using a Geographic Export Zone ........8 1...................................4.. 37 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format ................................................................................................ Lines.................................2 1..............2 1.................1..........................................9........1 1.....................................................3............................ 26 Zooming In on a Specific Area..................... 28 Measuring Distances on the Map ................................2............. 31 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools.........1 1..........4 1....................3 1.....................................................................................4..........................1 1....................... 20 Display Properties of Objects ......... 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 1............. 27 Using the Panoramic Window .....10................... 17 Renaming an Object ...........................3 1..................4.................................4........................................................... and Points ............7 1.................. 29 Using a Filtering Zone.......3.....................3 1.4..8............3.........................1 1....... and Points...................................2 1.................................................................. 31 Using a Printing Zone .......................... 29 Using a Computation Zone ................................................. 27 Moving the Map in the Document Window............................3..4...2...........8...2 1...........................................................................................................5 1..........................3................................3..................................3.....................................2........................8......9........ and Points Using the Context Menu ...........................................................................1 1........................................................ 33 Editing Polygons. 26 Zooming In and Out ......4.............. 17 Displaying the Properties of an Object .. 27 Centring the Map Window on an Object....................................................................................................... 29 Using Zones in the Map Window.5 1................................................................................................ 28 Displaying the Map Legend .....................3................2 5 The Working Environment ...................... 37 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results................................4........................................................2 1...................2.......................... 38 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format .......................................................... Lines................................2 1.......9 1...................2 1..8. 21 Defining the Display Properties of Objects .....................10..........11 1...10.............

.................................................................................3 1...........62 Advanced Data Filtering ..52 Printing in Atoll ....3 1........1 1...........................3 1.7.6........................8 1............6...................7....41 Adding..............69 Filtering on a Site List...................................................................70 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration .................................................................56 Grouping..2 1......................................................7...........................................................................................................43 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table ..........................................................................5................1....................2 1..6........................................................................................64 Advanced Filtering: Examples ...........................................63 Restoring All Records........13 Map Window Pointers .......................7 1....4 1.......68 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window ............53 Defining the Print Layout ........................................................8................................................................................................................ and Filtering Data.1..........60 Advanced Sorting ...42 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table.............................1 1................................................2...................................5.......2............................5 1...........5 1.......................................3............2 1....5 1..........................4 1....................................................................................................................................................................67 Site Lists......7 1......5...68 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window ...................8...........7.....52 Printing Data Tables and Reports ...........2 1.5......................64 User Configurations .........2........................................11 Working with Data Tables ...........7.......2...............40 1....8 1...........................................................58 Examples of Grouping ..........................5......1..71 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone..7.................5......................................6......................44 Defining the Table Format...................................................5..................................................8..........................................................................2 1...........72 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name ................................................................................................................................................5..............................7.............................3.................49 Exporting Tables to Text Files.........9 1............................3.........................................................7....4.52 Printing Recommendations ...............3..................................................1 1.............72 Undoing and Redoing ..7.........60 Sorting Data in Tables......72 Searching for Objects on the Map...............................................8........................................................ Sorting..........7.................................................................................70 Exporting a Folder Configuration..................7............................................................5............70 Importing a Folder Configuration..5................7.....5............6 1..7............................................................5...............................71 Tips and Tricks ..................................6............7.............67 Creating a Site List ............3 1.....................................59 Sorting Data ...............................6.....68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone ...............................73 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 1.......................1 1...................................69 Creating a Folder Configuration ..............7.........7...........................6.........................................2 1............70 Deleting a Folder Configuration..................................................................................42 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table ........1 1........................................47 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents .........................4..........................2................ and Editing Data Table Fields.................2......5....5....50 Exporting Tables to XML Files ............43 Editing the Contents of a Table..........................................5..................................8....................................................................Atoll User Manual 1............................4 1...........1................1 1..7................................7...........8...5.................................58 Advanced Grouping.55 Printing a Docking Window ..........6 1...............7.............................................................................................................................................68 Editing a Site List.........................................................................................70 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration .....3................................................1 1..........6 1..51 Importing Tables from XML Files ................6 1.......................................................6...56 Configuring the Group By Submenu ..................52 Printing a Map .......1 1.......................61 Filtering Data......................................................................5 1............................6....................4 1..........10 1..........................................................69 Folder Configurations...................................8 1.............1 1............................72 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property .........................................................................53 Defining the Printing Zone ......................7...............2 1....................42 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields ............56 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property .........7.......................................................4 1........................................................67 Importing a User Configuration ....................................................................6...............................................5........................3.................2.........................3 1..........57 Grouping Microwave Links by Site ......................................................................................................7..................................................................................................................................................7.......47 Copying and Pasting a Table Element ...................................... Deleting.......................................1 1.............................................................................................2 1.....................................................................73 Searching for a Point on the Map ...............................................7...........................1 1.......49 Importing Tables from Text Files..................3 1................4 1.............7..3 6 .........................1 1.........7.................7.....5...................6...............4 1...........3 1...........................6..........................44 Copying and Pasting in Tables ...............7................................................................4............................................................................................................66 Exporting a User Configuration .....................2 1.5 1.................1 1................................47 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells ................2 1.........................2 1..41 Opening a Data Table .......................................................................................................................................................................56 Grouping Data Objects......................................7....62 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection.....................................3 1..........................................................5.....................7................................................................................7 1...................................7.........................................................................................................2 1....................2 1.2.........................5.......................................................3 1..................................6..................................................7...........1.............5.................7........................................................................72 Refreshing Maps and Folders .........5 1...........2 1...........................1 1.....................6......3 1.............................5..........................................6..............................................................................6 1.........................................................54 Previewing Your Printing...........71 Creating and Comparing Subfolders............................3....

..................1 2.................................................................................... 108 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties ............. 74 Using Shortcuts in Atoll ................ 73 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer....................................3...........3 2..........2...............10.............. 105 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class .............................2..................2..........3............. 106 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer .......................................................................................................... 91 2.............5..................................................................................................1 3........................................................8......................................................................................10.1 2.............................5......................8..........2 3..................3............................... 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7 ...................1 © Forsk 2010 Geographic Data Sets ...........................10 3.....................................6 3...............................................................................3...1 3.................. 91 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects ............ 83 The Atoll Multi-User Environment .............................5 Clutter Classes........................3.4 2....................................... 96 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File ...............12 3........................................ 104 Adding a Clutter Class........... 106 3.........................................................................................................2....................... 105 Clutter Heights ......................................................................... 101 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders................................................2 2...3........3 2..............2 2....5 Starting an Atoll Project .......................................1 3.6 3..............4 3 3.................................................................................. 111 Displaying Information About Geo Data ................. 84 Working With a Document on a Database......7... 106 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer...........10...................................................... 83 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database .......................................1 2..............................8...............................................................Table of Contents 1.............................. 109 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data ....................................................................................... 79 Templates Available ............................................................ 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations .......... 85 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database .................................................................................................................10.......... 102 Embedding Geographic Data .............................................................................................................1 2..........5 1............................... 111 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area ................................2...............2.......... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ....................1 2..........5 3................................................................................... 74 Using Icons from the Toolbar ........2...................................... 97 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File ......... 95 Geographic Data Types .........2..................................................................... 105 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes ............ 79 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project ................................................. 106 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab.................................... 86 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database .................2.......................................................................................................................................2....................................................................................................4 3.. 108 Geoclimatic Maps .............................................................................................................3 Contours..... 80 Defining a New Atoll Document ....................... 111 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area ..... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ........................................ 90 Recovering a Backup .......................................................................3 3................................................1 3..................7 Using the Status Bar to Get Information.................9..................... 110 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas ...............................7.......................................................1 3.........................................................................................................9 3...........................................................3......................2 3......................2 3.....................................................................................1 3......2.............4 3.............................. 104 Defining Clutter Class Properties .......2...........8...............3...... and Points ...................................11 3....................................................................................................2 2................................................................2........................................ 87 Making a Backup of Your Document ......................................................................... 75 2 2........................ 107 Importing Several Scanned Images . 102 Digital Terrain Models ...........3..3.................. 90 Configuring Automatic Backup .................................................................2..................1 3...................................................................2 3....... 107 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images ......................................................................... 103 3... 98 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data.....7 3..... 109 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics.......... 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data...........................12.....1 3.....8...........................................................................................................2 3.......8..........................................................................5 3......4 3........................3...............2 2.....3.........1............................................3 3..............6 1.......... 81 Working in a Multi-User Environment .........................................10.......2.................2........... 112 Exporting a Geo Data Set ...................... 103 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes ...................4 1..............................2.......................................5................................................3 3.......................5....2 2.........................2 3................5................1...........................................8 3......................................2 3......................................................................................... 100 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File ........2 3.......................................................9........3........ 95 Supported Geographic Data Formats .................. 112 3................ 79 Creating an Atoll Document ..................................................................................................................................................2...7.....3 2....... Lines... 99 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database .................................................. 96 Importing Geo Data Files ........... 99 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type ...........1 3. 102 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File............2 3..............3 3.......1.......7 Managing Geographic Data ............... 107 Scanned Images ..............................................................

.....................Atoll User Manual 3...................................139 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility........................14...........146 Short-Haul Frequency Band.............................5...........13...2 3............3 4..........146 5.115 Saving Geographic Data ................................14...................................2...............117 Updating the Source File...............14...............3...................1..............................................................................................2 3........................138 Defining Compatibility Manually .............................................................123 Defining the List of Manufacturers ............4 3............................4 4...........123 Defining Antennas..........................................................13 3....................132 Interference Reduction Factor ..........................................2 4.....147 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band ............5....13.1 3........................1 6.........................................................................5 4 4..............................................................................3............................5............................118 Creating a New File from a Larger File ....................................116 Saving Modifications to an External File ..................................................117 Combining Several Files into One File........14............................2 3.................................3 5.................3.............................................3 4.............................2.........................................................................................................................................................................................................3 3.........1 3.....................3..................125 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns ........................................119 3................1 4..........146 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands .............................................................................151 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P...............................1 4......................138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table .....................151 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model ...............13...........................................................................................................................................................................1............................................................................2 4..............................................................13.......136 Microwave Waveguides and Cables ...3......2........................114 Editing Clutter Polygons ............................................................................1 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands .........................116 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File....................................................4 3...................................1 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ....................................................................................................115 Editing Geoclimatic Maps.......................1 5.........................12..........116 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File ..............1 3..............3......................5 4..............2.................137 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable .................................................132 Digital Hierarchies ......................3.........................................................452 Model............114 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons .....................................................................................................................2 4.....................................145 Microwave Frequency Bands .......................................................2.................................................................................2.......1 3...................................................1..2 6........................1 4.............................154 Defining Quality Objectives ......................4...................................2 5..............1 4...139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility .....................................................3.......................1............................113 Editing Clutter Class Maps..............2 4.............................115 Deleting Clutter Polygons........................127 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll.................................5...1 4.................................................................................1 4....1...............1...........................................2...........1..............118 Exporting an Embedded File...................................................2.......................................................................138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table .....................................................................1 5...............................156 Defining Calculation Parameters .....1..................139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility ...........................................1 4.......................................1................2 4.151 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects ........................3 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands ............1.2 6.................................................................................................................................................................145 Long-Haul Frequency Band .............................................................................1 6.................................................4 Antennas and Equipment...125 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns ...2..........................2 Importing a Geo Data Set ....2 4.......145 Medium-Haul Frequency Band ...............................154 Defining Performance Objectives......................5......156 Global Parameters .2..................138 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility ...................................2.....................................................2 Managing Calculations in Atoll .....................113 3.........1...............128 Importing Microwave Equipment......2 6.................................................14...................................1 6.....14 3.............2 Editing Geographic Data ......3.........123 Creating an Antenna .........................................148 6 6........................................................................3 6.14................................2 5.........................................................3 4..................1 4.....................................14.....3....................................1 6.............1........................................................................................................140 4...............................3........................................................133 Theoretical Graphs.........................................155 Defining Availability Objectives ..........................123 Importing Microwave Antennas...........137 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables.....................................5....153 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives ........114 Creating a Clutter Polygon ..............................................2 5 5....................................2..............................13.1...........................132 Advanced Configuration........4.........................154 Microwave Link Classes.........................13.....126 Microwave Equipment..................................2 4....................................156 6...............................3 3..................3 4............

....... 201 Description of a Passive Repeater ............................................................2 7.................................. 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ..2.......3 7. 175 Creating or Modifying a Site ............. 192 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ........2 7....................... 193 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile .....................................4 7................................5 7................... 191 Deleting a Microwave Link Template............................1.. 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis .........................................5 7...............2 7.................................................2..........................1............ 207 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets...............................3...5...............4............................................................1 7........................2........................................ 200 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights..................................................................5.................................2...2.......5.....................5...1 7...........2 6....................................................................................5...........................................................3.......................................................................... 176 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site .............................................................3.............................5...........................2......4.........................................................................................5 7.......3 7........................................................................................ 203 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins................................................................................................. 188 Defining Port Parameters .......1 7..2 7...............................2...................................................................................2..............4.2........................ 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links .......2......................................................................................2...4 7......................2 7.6 7........... 191 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map .5..........3 Link Parameters ................4.........2................. 206 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report..........6 7......3.......4 7.........2..................................1 7...............................................5.................... 195 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values ......................... 190 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template.....3 7.............................. 165 7 7.......2 7................... 181 Search Tools for New Sites ....1................................................... 179 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites ..........1...1.. 210 Studying Reflection .7 7...............2 7..... 200 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater......... 200 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse .......................................................3................................ 204 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget..........1 7....2.........2 © Forsk 2010 9 ..........................1 7... 206 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report ...3 Microwave Link Project Management .................................................................5..........................................4..........1.............................................................3.......................................2 7...................4 7....................................................................................................................................................................... 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7...................................5 7.......................................................... 173 Designing a Microwave Link Network . 176 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites .............................................................................. 185 Definition of a Microwave Link..................2.4......1 7......................1 7................ 193 Studying Microwave Link Clearance.... 175 Site Survey Tools ..............................3 7............................1.............................................1 7...............4..........................5.....................9 7............. 210 Displaying Reflection............4.....5.............1 7............................... 201 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater ...........3. 163 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links ..3..........................2...........3..............................3....................................... 202 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse ............................................... 192 Checking Data Consistency ..3..............5..................................................3 7....................... 184 Creating Microwave Links .......................................2.................4.....4............................... 174 Site Description.............. 192 Analysing the Path Profile ...................................... 205 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display..............1.......... 185 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link ......1 7...............7 7.............................................................1 7.............. 173 Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites .. 202 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability .............1............................................................................................................................6......................................2.............................1 7........................................................1......................2 6..................1 7........ 190 Managing Microwave Link Templates ..............................4 7...............4............ 207 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity...... 191 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links .......................2.............................3 7.................................................4..........................................1..........3........3..........3 7...........................................................................2... 191 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template ........... 197 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights..1...........................................................................................................................................5 7...............2.......2 7........... 206 Setting a Microwave Link as Active ...........1 6....... 204 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters ...............................3 7.............................................. 194 Zooming In on the Profile....... 189 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template...........................................................4 7................................4...5.... 208 Creating Multi-hops..............5..... 195 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile......... 193 Displaying the Path Profile ..2 7................................................. 200 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights..5.........................................................3........................5....2...2....................3..........................................2 7..........................................6.........1...3.....................................2 7...................................................... 203 Analysing a Single Microwave Link ...................... 180 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site ......................................................6 7...2...Table of Contents 6..... 176 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites...8 7.... 206 Analysing Microwave Links .........3.....3.......... 174 Creating Sites .............. 211 Analysing Reflections ...........................................................2 7................. 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link ..........3 7...............4............ 194 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options...................5.1 7.......................................................1......................................4......................................................3 7........................................................................3 7.......................................................3............................4.. 194 Printing a Microwave Link Profile..................................................2.........................3..........3......................2 7..

.......................217 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse .......224 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links ............................7..........................................2 7.2....................225 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links ................9...............................................3 7.....................................9...............230 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link...............................................................................................................8.1................................................214 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters ..........................222 Using IRF in Interference Calculations...................................................3 7....221 Interference Reduction Factor.......229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ........................6 7.......9.231 Index ........229 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally....................5 7.8...................225 Defining the Content of the Interference Report......................................................2 7.................227 Point-to-Multipoint Links.8.....................226 Displaying Interference on the Map .....................6 7..............9 7...........4 7.............8..1 7...............................8...........................................8...................9....................................................................8..................1...............................................6..................1 7............7....1................1.....................9.................................229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse .........9..................................................3 7.........................................................8 7.....................................................8........................................3 7....1.7 7...........9...226 Advanced Configuration.......8....230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse......................9.....................................5 7.......226 Managing Interference Calculation Validity...............................1 7....................................................6..................................................................7....................7.......1............2.5 7............1 7...........................8 7...224 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link ............................4 7...........1 7.......................227 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link ..................9......1...............................6...............................1.......................4....................................8.......212 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report ..216 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities .................10 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report.........1 7....230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub...........6.Atoll User Manual 7.....215 Planning Microwave Link Channels ...............................................................228 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active.................2 7.....1........................................7..................................................................................1....................2 7............................................................................................230 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link................218 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search..1....................1.......................................220 Analysing Interference ..9...........2 7..217 Creating a Report on Site Parities...................................3 7.................................................................221 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant......7..2..........................................9.........7................218 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser ....................214 Solutions Against Reflections.............1 7...........2 7.......................4............................................................................................................4 7.........................7 7........................................... 233 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ..................................1...............................227 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties .......2 7.............................................221 Defining IRF Graphs Manually .219 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products........................................................................217 Checking Site Parities on the Map .....9 7......1 7.............................................................................................................1........

Chapter 1 The Working Environment .

.

allowing you to manage large amounts of data. You can change the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they are displayed. You can also export the current display definition. The map is the working area for your document and Atoll provides many features for working with the map. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • "The Atoll Work Area" on page 13 "The Explorer Window" on page 15 "Working with Objects" on page 17 "Printing in Atoll" on page 52 "Working with Maps" on page 26 "Working with Data Tables" on page 41 "Grouping. consists of the main window where the map window and data tables and reports are displayed and the Explorer window. context menus. 1. such as a search tool to locate either a site. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 15. The tools open in separate windows. and Filtering Data" on page 56 "Tips and Tricks" on page 72. or you can link your project to external files. with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window. you can manage all objects in the Atoll document: sites. or change how the data is displayed. You can sort and filter the data in a table. and support for standard Windows shortcuts. or a vector. a point on the map. You can save the entire project as a single file. Atoll offers the standard Windows Print functionality. for cutting and pasting. The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables. Using the Explorer window. as well as geographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). Atoll offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document.1 on page 14). some of which can be docked into the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1. or configuration. The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. calculations. You can. to use it in other documents. Atoll also provides other tools.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1 The Working Environment The Atoll working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to create and define your microwave-planning project in a single application. support for drag-and-drop. etc. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a document arranged in folders. define various studies or configure the parameters or display of data objects. arranged in folders. or only certain objects. parts of it. and clutter classes. Sorting. Atoll uses standard Windows interface elements. shown in Figure 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 13 . for example. with the ability to have several document windows open at the same time. for example. You can also use the table feature to enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table. Atoll also allows you to undo recent changes to your document..1 The Atoll Work Area The Atoll work area.1 on page 14.

you can have several document windows open at the same time. You can change how these windows and tools are displayed. Other windows and tools. To cascade document windows: • Select Window > Cascade.Atoll User Manual Toolbar Document window (map) Workspace Explorer window (docked) Panoramic window (floating) Point Analysis window (docked) Figure 1. To tile document windows: • Select Window > Tile. As well. You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimising the window. To close a window: • Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. in order to display the title bar of each document window. or cascade them. allowing you to maximise the amount of area for document windows or other windows. display the content of the active document. You can also choose to remove them from their position and float them over the Atoll working environment. maximise. in order to display all of them at the same time.1. such as the Explorer window.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window Only document windows are part of an individual Atoll document. select the name of the window. 1. Depending on the position of the window. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. they will display the content of the active document. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. Depending on the position of the window. and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application.1: Atoll user interface 1. or you can have it float over the working environment. To minimise a window in its docking area: • Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the docking window. you can tile document windows. You can resize.1.1 Working with Document Windows When you have one Atoll document open. when you switch to a different document. You can leave a window in its docking area. To maximise a window in its docking area: • Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. but part of the working environment and. They are not part of the individual Atoll document. To display a window: • On the View menu. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

etc. It contains: A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models: Longley-Rice Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata Standard Propagation Model ITU 526-5 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 15 . or you can access and edit items individually. The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the working environment. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. 1. In this section.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To float a window: • Double-click the docking window title bar. Or • Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. press CTRL as you drag the docking window. with changes affecting all items in the folder. UMTS HSPA. WiMAX 802. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-clicking. CDMA2000 Simulations .1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs The Explorer window has three tabs: • The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. most folder contents can also be accessed in a table. You can modify items at the folder level.16e Parameters. As well. or LTE Simulations Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Hexagonal design Microwave links CW Measurements and Drive test data The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data. or LTE Parameters UMTS Simulations. WiMAX 802. WiMAX 802. allowing you to easily manage large amounts of information. the following are described: • • • • "Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 15 "Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 16 "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16 "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16.2 The Explorer Window The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. Note: You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it. double-click the docking window title bar. To dock a window: • To return the window to its previous docked location. To prevent the window from docking as you move it.) you import or create: Clutter classes Clutter heights Digital Terrain Model Population data Any other geo data map Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA. Depending on the modules installed with Atoll.16d Parameters.16e simulations. they remain the same no matter which document you open. WiMAX 802. 1. CDMA2000 Parameters. the Data tab has the following folders: • Sites Antennas Transmitters Predictions UMTS Parameters. For information on working with tables.2. Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document. The number of folders depends on the number and types of geographical data types (vector data. GSM/GPRS Parameters. scanned images. arranged in folders. CDMA2000) • The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules.16d Simulations.

A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. Note: You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the folder name. so that the results of one prediction are more clearly displayed.2. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and visible (see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16) and on the transparency of these layers (see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1. 1. Any additional module created using the API. you could hide all predictions but one.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer In Atoll. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. The check box appears cleared ( object is no longer visible on the map. To move a layer up or down: 1. 2. To expand a folder to display its contents: • Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of its name.2. For example. 2.2). When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ).2 Navigating in the Explorer Window The Explorer window has three tabs. Note: Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window. This allows you to hide one type of object so that another type of object is more plainly visible. Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name. Click and drag the object to its new position. To move from one tab to another: • Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window. each tab has objects and folders containing objects. As you drag the object.2. To hide an object on the map: 1. a horizontal black line indicates where the object will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1. the map is made of objects arranged in layers. it will still be taken into consideration during calculations. ) and the 1.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer You can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map.Atoll User Manual ITU 1546 WLL Microwave Propagation Model Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) The AFP models available in your Atoll installation. Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand ( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. it indicates that the folder contains both visible and hidden objects.

3 Working with Objects In Atoll.3. the following context menu commands common to all objects types are explained: • • • Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 17. Select Delete from the context menu. For more information. Note: In Atoll.1.1. Most objects in Atoll belong to an object type. the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects. you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers. For example.2 Deleting an Object You can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map. 1. Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18. a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter.3. To rename an object: 1. You can change the default prefix for sites by editing the atoll. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears. the following are explained: • • • "Using the Object Context Menu" on page 17 "Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map" on page 18 "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. see the Administrator Manual. The selected object is deleted. 2. In this section. Select Rename from the context menu.3. see "Printing Recommendations" on page 53. For more information. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears.ini file.2: Moving a layer Note: Before you print a map. To delete an object: 1. Individual objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default prefix. 1. an object’s context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that are common to most objects. 1. 1. Atoll enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object and selecting the operation from the context menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 17 . objects such as sites are named with default prefixes.1 Renaming an Object You can change the name of an object in Atoll. 3. Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 17. In this section. 2.1 Using the Object Context Menu In Atoll.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1.

When a site is selected.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object You can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue. both ends of its icon have a green point ( ). 2. Atoll prompts you to confirm these changes before switching to the next Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue appears. 1. Select Properties from the context menu. If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag. The context menu appears. you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters). you can switch only within this group. When there is more than one microwave link with with the same azimuth. To open the Properties dialogue of a data object: 1.3. In this section. The browse buttons are not available: • • • • When creating a new item. When a transmitter is selected.) in the same folder or subfolder in the Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( • • • • : jump to the first item in the list : jump to the previous item in the list : jump to the next item in the list : jump to the last item in the list ) in the lower-left corner of each Properties dialogue: If you have made any changes to the properties of an item.2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map In a complex microwave or -planning project. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. For repeater properties.1. you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity and the same flag. 18 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . etc. the following are explained: • • • • • "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19"Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20. or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. although it might be visible in the map window.3. the site (and its name) is surrounded by a black frame ( ). clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19). Switching Between Property Dialogues You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (antennas. it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been selected. You can also change the position of a site by dragging it. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and microwave links directly from the map. it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy. For propagation model properties. Tip: When you are selecting data objects on the map. If transmitters are grouped by a flag. When opening the an item’s Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table. For example: • • • If transmitters are grouped by site.Atoll User Manual 1. The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section. for example. sites. You can use this feature. to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening the Properties dialogue.

To select one of several microwave link with the same azimuth: 1. Figure 1. Select thelink from the context menu.3. When the position of a site is locked.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location If you want to improve the location of a site.3: Selecting one microwave link 2.2. you can adjust the location more precisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. using the mouse.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. 1. - When you select a microwave link. To move a site using the mouse: 1. Click and drag the site to the desired position. with 0° indicating north. or you can modify it on the map. Atoll enables you to select a specificmicrowave link. Tip: While this method allows you to place a site quickly. On the map. By default. 3. Release the site where you would like to place it. 2. In the map window. The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar. the exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar. To have Atoll move a site to a higher location: 1.2. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth.3).2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. An arc with an arrow appears under the pointer. Atoll can find a higher location within a specified radius from the current location of the site. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 19 . 2. Atoll locks the position of a site. 3.3. To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse: 1. you can set the azimuth of a link’s antenna by modifying it on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. click thelinks. It is defined in degrees. enter the radius of the area in which Atoll should search and click OK. The context menu appears. or by using the mouse. 1. Click Yes to confirm.3. Atoll moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius. In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue.2. both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined ( ). 4. in terms of reception and transmission. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. As you drag the site.1 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links If there is more than one microwave link with the same azimuth.3. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. A context menu appears with a list of thelinks with the same azimuth (seeFigure 1. Select Move to a Higher Location. 2.2. 3. Atoll asks you to confirm that you want to move the site. Right-click the site in the map window.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In Atoll. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). click the link extremity whose azimuth you want to modify. 1.

Release the mouse when you have moved the selected link extremity to the desired position.2. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity. 5. indicating it is selected. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. by pressing CTRL+Z. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity. The current coordinates (x and y) of the antenna are displayed in the far right of the status bar. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. The position of the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue.2. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. by pressing CTRL+Z. 2. in the toolbar) 1. you can change the position of the antenna relative to the site either by adjusting the Dx and Dy parameters or by entering the coordinates of the antenna position on the General Tab of the Microwave link Property dialogue. The site for the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue and the link is renamed. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the antenna from the site position.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse By default. antennas are occasionally not located directly on the site. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . On the map. To move a microwave link extremity using the mouse: 1. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. To select another site for the link extremity on the map: 1. 4. Release the mouse when the frame appears around the site. On the map.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse In Atoll. A cross appears under the pointer. 3. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made.3. you can change the link extremity and place it on another site using the mouse. 1. by pressing CTRL+Z. 5. or by clicking to undo the changes made. antennas are placed on the site. using the mouse. In Atoll. 3. You can also modify the position of the antenna on the map. Click the green rectangle and drag it to the other site on the map. A cross appears under the pointer. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth. click the link extremity you want to move. 4.Atoll User Manual 5. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the antenna’s position relative to the site. 2. However. The antenna’s azimuth relative to the link direction is modified on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. click the link extremity you want to move. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ).3. but a short distance away.

The Display tab is similar for all object types whose appearance can be configured.5). Set the display parameters. the following options are available: "Defining the Display Type" on page 22 "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23 "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24 "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 21 . Figure 1. Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window. Depending on the object type.3. 1. such as sites.3. The context menu appears.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects Figure 1. the display options are explained. 2. In this section.5: The Display tab for an individual site To define the display properties of an object type: 1. followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working on your Atoll document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 25).Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1.3 Display Properties of Objects In Atoll.4: The Display tab for Sites When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object. belong to an object type. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.3. How an individual object appears on the map depends on the settings on the Display tab of the object type’s Properties dialogue. most objects. Select the Display tab. 3. the Display tab will only show the options applicable to an individual object (see Figure 1.4). Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavailable on the Display tab of its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1.

iii. ii. a new site.ini file. for example. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. sites. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. For information on the commands available. iii. To change the display type: 1. v. 2. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. Define the ranges directly in the table below. 2. To modify the appearance of a symbol. click the symbol in the table. Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals. For more information. Properties: Atoll opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style. and enter a value in the Interval box. or to distinguish inactive from active sites. to distinguish population density. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. Notes: • • When you create a new map object. i. objects of different types. iv. i. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. You can define the default symbol used for sites and how it is displayed by editing an option in the atoll. Shading: Atoll opens the Shading dialogue. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table before the threshold selected in the table. you could use this display type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type. Delete: Atoll removes selected value from the table. you can choose from the following display types: unique. Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. Click OK. The value intervals will be determined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour. Click the Actions button. ii. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type. discrete values. To modify the appearance of a symbol. for example. see the Administrator Manual. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. By defining a unique symbol for an object type. Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field. see Figure 1. click the symbol in the table below. For information on the commands available. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. iv. Using the Actions Button The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Modify the symbol as desired. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. To access the Actions menu: 1. or automatic. Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour. are immediately identifiable. Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals. or the altitude of sites. iii. vi. you select Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. To modify the appearance of the symbol. value intervals. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. for example. signal strength.Atoll User Manual 5. Modify the symbol as desired. ii. you must click the Refresh button ( ) for Atoll to assign a colour to newly created object according to the set display type. Defining the Display Type Depending on the object selected. i. v. Modify the symbol as desired. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands: Select all: Atoll selects all the values in the table. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. This display type can be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. For an example. Enter the upper and lower limits of the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table after the threshold selected in the table. This display type can be used. For example. Select the display type from the Display Type list: Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. click the symbol in the table below.7 on page 24.

you can display information about each object in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. and some object types. Select the fields which you want to display in the label: a. An object is visible only if the scale. you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and an End Colour. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box. 2. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. To change the transparency: 1. including from fields that you add. This can be used to. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. 3. from top to bottom. 4.6: Defining a label 3. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display. Select Export if you want to export the display settings of the current object to a configuration file. such as clutter classes. To define an object visibility range: 1. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 2. Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types You can change the transparency of some objects. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to make it less transparent. They do not affect which objects are considered during calculations.Chapter 1: The Working Environment When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type. prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at a certain scale. c. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. such as predictions. for example. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Label box. b. Configuration: Select Import if you want to import an existing display configuration. Figure 1. so that you can share them with other users or use them in other documents. as displayed on the Map toolbar. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 23 . Click OK to close the Field Selection dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type. To change the order of the fields. Defining the Visibility Scale You can define a visibility range for object types. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box. To define a label for an object type: 1.6). is within this range. and for printing and previewing printing. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Defining the Object Type Label For most object types. such as sites. 2.

The Legend window appears. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click Note: to remove it. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. To define tip text for an object type: 1. you can display information about each object in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. To display the Legend window: • Select View > Legend. you can also display object information in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. b. The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window. To select a field to be displayed in the tool tip for the object type. Once you have defined the tool tips. and Point to Multipoint folders. For more information on tool tips. Adding an Object Type to the Legend You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) in your Atoll document’s legend. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window. you must activate the tool tip function before they appear. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object.6). including from fields that you add. In the Explorer window. 2. This option has the advantage of keep object-related information permanently visible.Atoll User Manual Note: For most object types.7. Select the fields which you want to display in the tool tip: a. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For information on displaying or hiding objects. Figure 1. the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead. such as sites and microwave links. In Figure 1. you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend. The defined display will appear on the legend. Defining the Object Type Tip Text For most object types. Check the Add to legend box. and their subfolders. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. Links. For more information on tool tips. 2. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Tip Text box. the intervals defined are: • • • Signal level >= -65 red -65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 intervals) Signal level < -105 not shown in the coverage. 3. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. To activate the tool tip function: • Click the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. the tool tip displays the total numbers of elements present in the Sites. Multi-Hops. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object.7: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend With value intervals. 1. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. For most object types. If there is no information entered in this column. This option has the advantage of not filling the map window with text. on the Display tab of a signal level prediction.

Chapter 1: The Working Environment You can also display the comments defined in the properties of a coverage prediction in the Legend window by setting an option in the atoll.3. you can change the range of data displayed. 2.Signal Level Study" on page 25.Server Coverage Studies When doing a best server prediction." Because Atoll ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. these value intervals appear as differences of shading. Click the Refresh button ( ) to update the display of the study results. The result is visible in Figure 1. 4. For example. However. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 25 . Shading . In Figure 1.10 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm.Server Coverage Studies" on page 25 "Shading . 1.9: Automatic display type To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type: 1.9.3. Select the Display tab. The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study. see the Administrator Manual. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects In this section are the following examples of how display properties of objects can be used: • • "Automatic Display Type . the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values. In this example. On the map. For more information about setting options in the atoll. for each pixel on the map. The Properties dialogue appears. the study results are also immediately visible.11. 5. This way.8: Value interval display type Figure 1. you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received on each pixel." with the site name as the chosen value. the interval between each break. If the selected display type for transmitters is "Automatic. Select Properties from the context menu. You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the results easier to read or more relevant to your needs. 3. Figure 1. Automatic Display Type . Click OK. if you are more interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm. In Figure 1." Atoll colours each pixel on the map according to the colour of the transmitter that is best received on that pixel.ini file.8. or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible. the transmitter display type is "Automatic. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window. The context menu appears. Atoll calculates. The difference in colour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each pixel.ini file. you can change the shading to display only those values.Signal Level Study Atoll displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals. 6. which server is best received. Figure 1.

1. you do so based on the position of the cursor on the map. 1. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue. Note: You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL++. Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105. 2. 4. Atoll also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23). 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Change the value of the First Break to "-80".1 Changing the Map Scale You can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out. Lines. The Properties dialogue appears. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q). The context menu appears. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading. or by choosing a scale. Select Properties from the context menu.4 Working with Maps Atoll has the following functions to help you work with maps: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Changing the Map Scale" on page 26 "Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 27 "Using the Panoramic Window" on page 27 "Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 28 "Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 28 "Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 28 "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29 "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 "Editing Polygons. by selecting Zoom In from the View menu. Click the map where you want to zoom in. 2.1 Zooming In and Out Atoll offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study." 6. When you zoom in or out on the map. and Points" on page 34 "Saving a Map as a Graphic Image" on page 39 "Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 40. 3. Select the Display tab. The Shading dialogue appears.4. "Map Window Pointers" on page 40. or by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward.10: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed: Figure 1. by zooming in on a specific area of the map.1. To zoom in on the map: 1.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.4. 5.11: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm 1. 7. 1.

4. Press ENTER. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 27 . 1. When you release the mouse button. Atoll zooms the map to the entered scale.3 Choosing a Scale To choose a scale: 1. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i. 1. 2. A dark rectangle indicates what part of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window. 2. Select the scale from the list. Note: You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+–. Drag the border to its new position. or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward. the dark rectangle).1.4. Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction. 2. 2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To zoom out on the map: 1.e. 1. allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas. ) on the Map toolbar. Click in the scale box ( 2. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out. Drag to the opposite corner. 3. Click the arrow next to the scale box ( 2.1. If the scale value you want is not in the list: 1. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. Once you have returned to a previous zoom level.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window You can move the map in the document window using the mouse. You can use the Panoramic window to: • • • Zoom in on a specific area of the map Resize the displayed map area Move around the map. When you release the mouse button. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).4.4. by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. ) on the Map toolbar.3 Using the Panoramic Window The Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data.4. Click the Move Map Window button ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL + D). To move between zoom levels: • • Click the Previous Zoom button ( ) to return to a zoom level you have already used (or press ALT + ←).. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. To move the map in the document window: 1. 1. Enter the desired scale. 3.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels Atoll saves the last five zoom levels. Drag to the opposite corner. ) to return to the latest zoom 1. Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+W). 2. helping you situate the displayed area in relation to the entire map.1. To resize the displayed map area: 1. To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. click the Next Zoom button ( level (or press ALT + →).

Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar. As you move the pointer away from the first point. where you will have to change direction on the line. Select Tools > Options. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point. and the total distance.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map You can display rulers around the map in the document window. You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measure distance along a line with several points. 2. Click the first point on the map once.. 2. 4. Tip: If you want to quickly find an object. In the Options dialogue. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept. the dark rectangle).Atoll User Manual To move around the map: 1. 2. 1. Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu. or on any zone in the Zones folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. As you move the pointer away from the first point. You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. When you reach the last point on the line. the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. on the map. To the map window on a selected object: 1. 2. To measure a distance on the map between two points: 1.e. Atoll will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure). Total distance between Azimuth between secondfirst and last point last and last point Distance between secondlast and last point Figure 1.4. Place the pointer over the second point on the map. a site. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points: 1.12): The total distance between the first point and the last point The distance between the second-last point and the last point The azimuth between the last two points. Click the first point on the map once. a transmitter.4. Drag the rectangle to its new position.5 Measuring Distances on the Map You can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. for example. The Distance Measurement tool also gives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object You can centre the map on any selected object. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar.12: Measurement data in the status bar 1. the azimuth of each segment between two points. 3. 2. click the Coordinates tab.4. such as a site. 3. Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i. To display rulers: 1. 1.12): The distance between the two points The azimuth between the two points. you can select it in the Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.

1.1 Creating a Filtering Zone To create a filtering zone: 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. Focus Zone: With the focus zone.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3. To display the legend: • Select View > Legend. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. if you have filtered the sites using a filtering zone. The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it. etc. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data objects on the map clearer. 2. 4.8. etc. Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. 4. In this section. b.). The zones are a type of polygons. if you have drawn a zone. c. select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window.4. 3. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24. In other words.e. etc.1 Using a Filtering Zone The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. By limiting the number of sites. For example. 5. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29 "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30 "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31 "Using a Printing Zone" on page 33 "Using a Geographic Export Zone" on page 33. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. • • • • 1. Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which microwave links are to be taken into consideration in calculations (i. Atoll provides you with a set of tools known as zones. if you have drawn a zone.8 Using Zones in the Map Window On the Geo tab of the Explorer window.4.4. link budget. Geographic Export Zone: The geographic export zone is used to define part of the map to be exported as a bitmap. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. even if you have cleared the filtering zone’s visibility check box. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. which can be created and modified in the same way as contours. In other words.1. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. you can select the areas of coverage predictions or other calculations on which you want to generate reports and results. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. the sites outside the filtering zone will not be taken into consideration in coverage predictions. Draw the filtering zone: a. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder. 1.. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. For information on adding object types to the legend. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 29 . 1. Under Display rulers.4.7 Displaying the Map Legend You can display a map legend. or points. lines.8. Click OK. Important: Zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. interference analysis.. Select Draw from the context menu. Zones can be used to define areas of the map for the following purposes: • Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone.

for example. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out.2. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( ). Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Filtering Zone from the context menu. The context menu appears. Select Draw from the context menu.8. you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. For more information on the polygon editing tools. 1. Note: You can export the filtering zone as a polygon. 4. • Once you have created a computation zone. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. if you have drawn a computation zone. When you make a link budget or you study interference. filtered (i. for example. 5. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Computation Zone from the context menu. Atoll calculates all the microwave links that are active. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. b. a polygon describing an administrative area. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. you can import it and use it as a computation zone.e. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. and intersects the computation zone. 1. You can also create a filtering zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the filtering zone. see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. In other words. 3. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible.Atoll User Manual The filtering zone is delimited by a blue line.1 Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1.. that are selected by the current filter parameters). it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone.4. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.4. by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. For more information on the polygon editing tools. to indicate that the folder contents have been filtered. If there is no computation zone defined. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available.2 Using a Computation Zone The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. On the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. When working with a large network. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Draw the computation zone: a. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the computation zone. 2. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. a polygon describing an administrative area. • Once you have created a filtering zone. c. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.8.

3. However. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.1 Drawing a Focus Zone To define a focus zone: 1.4. You can also create a focus zone in one of the following ways: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the focus zone. 5. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. 4. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Exporting the computation zone: You can export the computation zone by rightclicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. in the following ways: Saving the focus zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration. by using a focus zone for the report. Select Draw from the context menu. you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites. you can import it and use it as a focus zone. 2. for example. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. You can edit these zones by editing the points that define them. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. • 1. Atoll will use the computation zone. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. Atoll takes the focus zone taken into account whether or not they are visible.3 Using a Focus Zone Using the focus zone . When you no longer need the zone.It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 31 . or by deleting parts of the polygons that make up these zones. Draw the focus: a. In other words.8. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. and filtering zones. you can delete it from the map. by combining several polygons. - 1. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. you can define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to define an area for reports. if you have drawn a focus zone. Right-click the Focus Zone folder. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. if no focus zone is defined. Exporting the focus zone: You can export the focus zone by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.8. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. A focus zone is delimited by a green line. Note: You can save the focus zone . focus zone. 3. interference studies. The computation zone defines the sites and microwave links calculated in link budget. instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated.4.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can save the computation zone.8. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Focus Zone from the context menu. b. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. c. etc.4. Note: A focus zone can consist of more than one polygon. The context menu appears. 1. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filters the displayed results. a polygon describing an administrative area. in the following ways: Saving the computation zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration. The polygons of a focus zone must not intersect or overlap each other.

Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone To edit a point of a polygon zone: 1. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. The pointer changes ( ).8. To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. 1. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. In this section. ii. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. Select Edit from the context menu. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices.4. ii. The point is deleted. Before you can edit a polygon zone. Draw more polygon zones if desired. A point is added to the polygon zone border at the position of the pointer. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar In Atoll. Atoll merges them. you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. The pointer changes ( ). The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. and focus zone polygons can contain holes. 4.4. : To combine several polygon zones: In the Vector Edition toolbar. 2. The filtering. the following are explained: • • "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32 "Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 33. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. If polygon zones overlap. v. click the Combine button ( ). Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections: • • • "Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 33. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. Drag the point to its new position. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit. Click the contour to edit. To put the polygon zone in editing mode: 1. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. The pointer changes ( ). Adding a point to the polygon zone: i. iv. Double-click to close the polygon zone. Deleting a point from a polygon zone: i. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. : To delete part of the selected polygon zone: 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select the polygon zone.Atoll User Manual The computation and focuspolygons can contain holes.1 Editing Polygon Zones You can edit polygon zones in several ways. You can now edit it by: Moving a point: i. ii. you must first put it in editing mode. iii. ii. computation. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone. Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone. 3. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. 2. 2.

or point from the map. iii. Atoll creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two polygons and deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap. : To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. click the Split button ( ). Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export the map as a raster image. ii. click the Intersection button ( ). you can define a geographic export zone.4. iv. 2. ii. : To split the selected polygon into several polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Click the polygon zone you want to edit.2 Removing a Polygon Zone When you no longer need a polygon zone. iii. The Properties dialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone. 3.Chapter 1: The Working Environment i. iv. From the context menu.4. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now displayed. iv. Double-click to close the polygon. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. 4. or point. click the Delete button ( ).8. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one. Tip: You can also delete it by right-clicking its border on the map and selecting Delete from the context menu. After you have defined a geographic export zone. Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53. 1. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Move the contour. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 33 . i. 2. 1. Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove. For information on using the printing zone. In the Vector Edition toolbar. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. or point on the map. Atoll separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected polygon and creates a new polygon. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu When you are editing polygon zones. or point. Double-click to close the area. line. you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Double-click to close the polygon. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following: Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. To remove a polygon zone: 1. Move: i. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. line. line. To edit a polygon zone using the context menu: 1. ii. Click to place the contour.5 1. you can access certain commands using the context menu.8. Using a Geographic Export Zone If you want to export part of the map as a bitmap. ii. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour.4. select Delete Zone.4. i.6 Using a Printing Zone The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. iii.8. line. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. iii.

by a transmitter attribute. are specific types of polygons. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone.4. Important: The geographic export zone can only export in raster format. b. lines. Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the polygons. geoclimatic maps. the different ways of editing polygons. For more information on the polygon editing tools. and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 37. You can edit polygons by editing the points that define them. Select Draw from the context menu. and points are explained: • • • • • • "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34 "Creating Polygons. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. Draw the geographic export zone: a. and points. When you no longer need the polygon. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. You can also modify certain geographic data maps. and Points Atoll uses different types of polygons. by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. or by total losses). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. lines and points.9 Editing Polygons. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. described in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counterclockwise order. the zones such as the computation and focus. 2.4. The context menu appears. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. 4. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. You can also create a geographic export zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the geogaphic export zone. For information on modifying certain geographic data maps by adding a vector layer. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example.1 Adding a Vector Layer You can add vector objects such as polygons. For example. Another type of polygon. lines. Lines. and Points" on page 35 "Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines" on page 35 "Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar" on page 36 "Editing a Point" on page 36 "Editing Contours. Lines. Polygons. line. lines. Fit to Map Window: You can create a geographic export zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. be used to add additional information to geographic data. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. You can import it by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. When you release the mouse. called contours. 5. lines or points to geographical map information in a project by first creating a vector layer. • Once you have created a geographic export zone. by path loss. or by deleting parts of the polygons. Note: You can export the geographic export zone as a polygon.Atoll User Manual To define a geographic export zone: 1. and points in the map window. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. 1. 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and points. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. for example. 1. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line . by adding a vector layer to them and afterwards adding polygons. Lines. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. by signal level. you can import it and use it as a geographic export zone. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. including the computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. lines. by combining several polygons. or point. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. You can move or delete the points that define polygons. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a geographic export zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Geographic Export Zone from the context menu. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 3. you can delete it from the map. In this section. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31.9. can along with lines and points. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account.

New Rectangle: a. By renaming each vectors folder. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar: New Polygon: a. right-click the vector layer folder. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. line. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. 2. or point to a vector layer: 1.4. The context menu appears. and points to it. b. Lines. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. 1. c. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Lines. The pointer changes ( Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited ).9. New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point. Click once on the map where you want to begin the line. lines. see "Creating Polygons.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add a vector layer to the Geo tab: • Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) ) on the Vector Edition toolbar. The tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are available. you can add polygons. Select Edit from the context menu. select View > Vector Edition Toolbar. and Points Once you have created a vector layer.. © Forsk 2010 Position the pointer over the point you want to move. b. 1.4. For more information. 3. Right-click the vector layer on the Geo tab. The context menu appears. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. To edit the shape of polygons and lines: 1. For information on renaming objects. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.2 Creating Polygons. b. Double-click to end the line. you must define the value the polygon or rectangle represents and map the vector layer. For information on adding vector objects such as contours. Atoll creates a folder called "Vectors" on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. c. Note: If the polygon or rectangle is on the vector layer of a geoclimatic map. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. and points to the vector layer. Tip: You can also make the vector tools available by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. 4. New Line: a. lines.9. 35 . c. You can now edit by: Moving a point: i. Double-click to close the contour. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. as explained in "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34. and Points" on page 35. 3. Click each time you change angles on the line.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines You can edit the shape of polygons and lines on the vector layer. Select Edit from the context menu. Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar. Select the contour or line. 2. To add a polygon. If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible. you can ensure that you select the correct folder.

Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected contour and creates a new contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point. click the Intersection button ( ). Select Edit from the context menu. 1. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one.Atoll User Manual ii. i. Adding a point to a contour or a line: i. Select Edit from the context menu. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. ii. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. : To combine several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. iii. To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1.4. Deleting a point from a contour or a line: i. iv. iv. right-click the vector layer folder. iv.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar In Atoll. The context menu appears. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . click the Delete button ( ). you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The point is deleted. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Double-click to close the area. Drag the point to its new position. : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. 3. 1. click the Combine button ( ).4. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.9. Double-click to close the contour. iv. ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one. Draw more contours if desired. : To delete part of the selected contour: In the Vector Edition toolbar. i. iii. i. ii. 2. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. iii. iii. right-click the vector layer folder. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. If contours overlap. The pointer changes ( ).5 Editing a Point To edit a point: 1. Click the contour to edit. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. click the Split button ( ). Atoll merges them. ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. The context menu appears. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. : To split the selected contour into several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar.9. v. 2. The pointer changes ( ). Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Double-click to close the contour. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. A point is added to the contour border or line at the position of the pointer. Double-click to close the contour. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour. ii.

iii. line. ArcView© grid. Atoll suggests the formats that can be used for all the coverage predictions to be exported. and points. you can export in ArcView©. The pointer changes ( ). Select Move from the context menu to move the contour. ii. In this case. or point. ii. by a transmitter attribute.4. you can export in BMP. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. by path loss. The file exported can then be imported as a vector or raster object in Atoll or in another application. The pointer changes ( ). When you export more than one coverage prediction.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. line. Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour. 3. Drag the point to its new position.10 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results In Atoll. line. Click the point you want to move. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following: Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. You can now edit by: Moving: i. Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour. lines. Click the point you want to delete. Lines. or AGD formats. line. or you can export a defined area of the coverage prediction. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. or point. the following are explained: • • • "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format" on page 38 "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format" on page 38 "Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions" on page 39. Move: i. MapInfo©. or point. or by total losses). Click to place the contour. To edit a vector object using the context menu: 1. and any Properties of the contour. however. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 37 . JPEG 2000. or point from the map.6 Editing Contours. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point. and Points Using the Context Menu When you are editing contours. ii. The point is deleted. You can export coverage predictions separately or you can export several coverage predictions at the same time. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer. TIF. Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line. In this section. Only the commands relevant to the selected contour. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. by signal level. the Surface of the object. you can export the entire coverage prediction. Deleting a point: i. you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. or point are displayed in the context menu. or point. Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour. you can access certain commands using the context menu. the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage.9. or point on the map. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. line. you can not export a coverage prediction in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. Select the point. 1. line. 2. Move the contour. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. In raster formats. All coverage types can be exported. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. Note: 1. line. only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.4. Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. line. or point. Click the vector object you want to edit. In vector formats.

The Save As dialogue appears.2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format To export a coverage prediction in raster format 1. The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone. enter the File name and select the vector format from the Save as type list. 4. 5. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export. c. change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported. e.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format To export a coverage prediction in vector format: 1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window.10. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. The Save As dialogue appears. In the Save As dialogue. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. The default resolution is the resolution of the coverage prediction results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue). You can export the entire coverage prediction. 1. a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction. The Raster Export dialogue appears. If desired. To export part of the coverage prediction: a. enter the File name and select the raster format from the Save as type list. Draw the geographic export zone by clicking the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone and dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. If desired. d. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. f. When you release the mouse.4. b. 2. c. the geographic export zone. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. For information on displaying objects in the map window. 4. Under Region. Select Draw from the context menu. The context menu appears. select the area to export: The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by the study. under Coordinate Systems. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format: a. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. or 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. 2. b. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. move the Smoothing slider. or part of the coverage prediction. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. In the Save As dialogue.4.Atoll User Manual 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 7. change the Resolution of the exported coverage. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. define the geographic export zone: a. If desired. 5. To export the geographic export zone. 6. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. For information on displaying objects in the map window. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. or enter the percentage in the text box. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. 3.10. To export the entire coverage prediction: Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. b. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu.

The Save As dialogue appears. or by total losses).11 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image You can save a map as a graphic image. Select Export Coverages from the context menu.Chapter 1: The Working Environment The Geographic Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the geographic export zone. Atoll allows you to save files larger than 2 Gb. 2. 1. c. Click Export to export the selected coverage predictions. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. 8. Right-click the the Predictions folder. To save a map as a graphic image: 1. To export several coverage predictions at the same time: 1. and ArcView Grid (TXT). by path loss. the file is converted using the selected coordinate system. 6. BIL. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. Click Export. b. you can define the following parameters: Folder: Enter the folder you want to store the exported coverage predictions in or click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to it. select a destination folder. Atoll will add the date and time to the file name of each exported coverage prediction. 4. The selected coverage predictions are saved in the selected folder. 7. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 39 . you can export them at the same time. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. You can select: Selection: The area on the map selected in step 1. by a transmitter attribute. or enter the percentage in the text box. Select File > Save Image As.10. you should select the TIF. Format: Select the vector file format you want Atoll to export the coverage predictions in. The following file formats are supported: TIF. Click the Select an area button ( 2. The Map Export dialogue appears. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears. If desired. 4. Notes • When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in Atoll. Resolution in metres: You can define a resolution for the exported coverage predictions. Note: When you export several coverage predictions at the same time. or TXT format. 3. 1. b. 5. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. select the zone that you wish to save as an image. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. select the check boxes corresponding to the coverage predictions you want to export. In the Save as dialogue. by signal level. 6. enter a File name.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions If you have several coverage predictions that you want to export. Geographic Export Zone Printing Zone ) in the Map toolbar. Atoll does not take the geographic export zone into consideration. In the Coverage Export dialogue. The geographic export zone is only taken into consideration for raster file formats. Click OK to finish exporting the coverage prediction results. Atoll selects the check boxes of all coverage predictions whose visibility check box is selected on the Data tab of the Explorer window.4. 5. Define the area to save: a. The Coverage Export dialogue appears. Drag to the opposite corner. In the Map Export dialogue. Click Save. By default. and select a file type from the Save as type list. move the Smoothing slider.4. When saving in BIL format. BMP. 3. BIL. The context menu appears. If you wish to use the saved file as a digital terrain model. Under Options. • You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. Time stamp: If you select the Time stamp check box.

or draw vector or raster rectangles on the map. The zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out at the location of the mouse pointer The zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking and dragging to define the area. and enter a pixel size in the text box. 6. is pasted as an image into the new document. and by double-clicking to close the polygon. you can define the zone to be displayed on the map. The pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone. 9. select Include Rulers. Note: You can also select Bitmap to paste the selection without rulers. enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways: Select Use Screen Resolution Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres. Select Edit > Copy Image. 1. including the rulers. click and drag diagonally.12 Copying a Map to Another Application You can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application. Click OK. Atoll then creates a geo-reference file for the exported image. and each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map. in the Panoramic window. The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites or links. b. To define a zone. Click OK. Zoom area Pencil 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The area of the map. click pointer once to start. If you wish to export the image with rulers. or draw vector or raster polygons on the map. Close the polygon by clicking twice. click and drag diagonally. by clicking once to start the polygon. 5. on the map. Define the area to copy: a. In the new application. you must define the size of the exported image by pixel size. To draw a polygon.4. 8. select Scale.13 Map Window Pointers In Atoll. ) in the Map toolbar. or Text to paste the upper left and lower right coordinates of the selection. 7. Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size. select Edit > Paste Special. draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/ eographic export Polygon drawing zones. 1. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. once to create each corner. Open the application into which you want to paste the image. the pointer appears in different forms according to its function. 9. Click OK. The Copy Image dialogue appears. Rectangle drawing pointer Hand Zoom tool The rectangle drawing pointer indicates you can draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/geographic export zones. select Picture (Enhanced Metafile). Click the Select an area button ( 2. Drag to the opposite corner. Each pointer is described below: Appearance Description Selection arrow Meaning The zone selection pointer indicates that. In the Paste Special dialogue. Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model. To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application: 1. select Pixel Size. To define a zone. 3.4. you can define a zone to print or copy and.Atoll User Manual Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale. 4.

delete the polygon. The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the second point. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • "Opening a Data Table" on page 41 "Adding. and group the data contained in these tables. each subsequent link creates anew point. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by clicking on one of the edges and dragging. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user can choose when filling in the field.5. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab. You can move an existing point by clicking and dragging an existing point. When you create a new column. The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a microwave link. and view a statistical analysis of the data.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Appearance Description Deletion Position indicator Meaning The deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal clutter zone by clicking its border. The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link. delete the polygon. each subsequent click creates another point in the link. etc. or centre the map on the polygon. The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the map window. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42 "Editing the Contents of a Table" on page 43 "Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 44 "Defining the Table Format" on page 44 "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47 "Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents" on page 49 "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49 "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50 "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51 "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. In the case of a multihop link. In this section. You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns. you can create a default value for a field you create. the distance between the first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar. The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna. 2. Select/create points Microwave link start End Multi-hop or point-tomultipoint microwave link Rotate hub antenna of point-tomultipoint link Measurements on the map Terrain section 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 41 . In the case of a point-to-multipoint. microwave links. As you move the pointer. 3. You can filter. You can also export the data or import data into the Atoll data tables. sort. 1. You can right-click to open a context menu to delete a point. Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a point. Select Open Table from the context menu. antennas. Once you have created the first point.) in the form of tables.1 Opening a Data Table To open a data table: 1. Deleting. The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start point of your measurement.5 Working with Data Tables Atoll stores object data (sites. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. the microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link. connected to the hub by a link. or centre the map on the polygon. containing all their parameters and characteristics. The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon.

Click Add. each corresponding to a field. you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. You can create a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box. you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. double. and Editing Data Table Fields The data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table. Every data table in Atoll is created with a default set of columns. When opening an Atoll document from a database.13: The Table tab 1. The Default value of the field. To add a custom field to an object type’s data table: 1. The Group to which the field belongs. separating each list item with a hard return. true/false. A dialogue appears where you can view the existing fields and add or delete new ones. Select Table Fields from the context menu. Default Value: If you want.5. The context menu appears. The dialogue displays the following information for each type of data (see Figure 1.2. or currency) Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this object type. Figure 1.2. Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. Enter a size in characters. the following functions are explained: • • • "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42 "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42 "Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 43 1. In this section.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table You can add a custom field to any object type’s data table. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes: Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database Group: If desired. - 42 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields The fields contained in an object type’s table are defined in a dialogue.5. The Type of the field. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42. instead of loading all custom fields.13): The Name of the field in the database (Name). The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend). 2. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1. long integer. Deleting. short integer. open the data table as described in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.Atoll User Manual 1. When you open an Atoll document from a database.14). To access an object type’s table fields: 1. single.5. date/time. Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type.2 Adding. In the Explorer window. 2. 3. instead of loading all custom fields. you can select a group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. Type: Select a type for the field (text. The maximum Size of the field. Right-click the table in the map window.

Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an object type’s data table. 4. Tip: Some fields can not be deleted. Your changes are automatically saved. Click OK to return to the object type table. 3. the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted.16) or enter a new value. 1. you can select a value from the list (see Figure 1. 5. Tip: If a list of options has been defined for a field. Note: User or custom fields are for information only and are not taken into account in any calculation. 2. 3. The field is deleted from the object type’s data table. Click Delete.5.3 Editing the Contents of a Table To edit the contents of a table: 1. To delete a custom field from an object type’s data table: Caution: All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself. as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42. Figure 1. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table.5. Select Open Table from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table You can delete custom fields from an object type’s data table. If you select a field and the Delete button remains unavailable. Make sure that you are not deleting important information.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 4.2.14: The Field Definition dialogue 1. 2. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1. You can find these fields in the Other Properties tab of an object type’s Properties dialogue. Select the custom field that you want to delete. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. 1.15). Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 43 .

antenna. Select Record Properties from the context menu.5. transmitter.15: Editing data in the transmitters data tables Figure 1. You can change the format of the data table by: • • • • • • "Formatting the Column Headers" on page 45 "Formatting Table Columns" on page 45 "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45 "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 46 "Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 46 "Moving Columns" on page 46 44 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table You can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object. Right-click the record whose properties you want to see. a site. for example. Note: You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record. from its data table. 2. double-click the left margin of the record instead of the record itself.5 Defining the Table Format Atoll lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented.16: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables 1.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. 3.5. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. or cell. To avoid editing the record when you double-click. To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object: 1.

Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1. font Size. by selecting a Foreground colour. and Text Colour. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. and a pattern from the list box. 3. Select Format > Column Format.18). Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Formatting the Column Headers 1. you change the row height for every row in the table. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. 3. 2. Effects. and Text Colour. When you change the column width. a Background colour. To change the row height: 1. Click OK. 4. and the Colour for each column header. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Select Format > Header Format. Click OK. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. a Background colour. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. you change the width only for the selected column. Formatting Table Columns 1. Borders: You can select the Border. 2.17). font Size. the Type. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1. Figure 1. 2. Borders: You can select the Border. Effects. Outline (the font style).17: Changing column width Figure 1. and a pattern from the list box. 2. Outline (the font style). and the Colour for each column header. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. 4. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. however. The Format dialogue appears. by selecting a Foreground colour. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. The Format dialogue appears.18: Changing row height © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 45 . When you change the row height. the Type. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. Changing Column Width or Row Height You can change the column width and row height in a data table. To change the column width: 1.

You can keep this column. 3. 5.Atoll User Manual Displaying or Hiding a Column You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to freeze. 3. while scrolling through the Sites table. To hide a column. Note: You can not freeze a column in a report table. Tip: You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. To unfreeze columns: • Select Format > Unfreeze columns. Note: You can only freeze adjacent columns.19: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue Note: You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns command from the context menu. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men. 2. or any other column visible. Select the header of the column you want to move. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 2. Moving Columns In Atoll. Select Format > Display Columns. To display a column. clear its check box. 2. 46 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . by freezing it. select its check box. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Freezing or Unfreezing a Column In Atoll. You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to move. 4. To freeze a column: 1. you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order.19). Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. you might want to have the Name column always visible. Click Close. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. For example. To move a column: 1. you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontally through the table. Figure 1. To display or hide a column: 1.

To create a new element by copying and pasting: 1. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data (see Figure 1. Atoll. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Cut (CTRL+X). Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area.20: Moving columns Note: It may be necessary to click Refresh in the Map toolbar for your changes to appear.6. Click in the left margin of the table row marked with the New Row icon ( ) to select the entire row." You can edit this name. In this section.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells You can paste the same data into several cells. 4. To paste the same data into several cells: 1. and Paste (CTRL+V) commands on the Edit menu. 3. Select Edit > Paste to paste the copied data into the new row. creates a new element from the copied data. Note: Each element in a table must have a unique Name. preceded by "Copy of. pasting it into a new row and editing the details that are different.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent.20). the following is explained: • • "Copying and Pasting a Table Element" on page 47 "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 47. 1. 1. 2. you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C).5.6. You can copy and paste data to create new elements or you can copy and paste the same data into several cells. 1. As you drag the column. Figure 1.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables In Atoll. using Fill Up or Fill Down.5. Select Edit > Copy to copy the table row. 3.5. the position the column will occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1. 2.21). 5. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. The name of the new element is the same as that of the copied element. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the element to select the entire row.1 Copying and Pasting a Table Element You can create a new element in tables by copying an existing element. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 47 .

Figure 1. select Edit > Fill > Down (see Figure 1.22: Copying the contents of the top cell To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.23). Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells.21: Selecting the cells 3. Figure 1.23: Copying the contents of the bottom cell 48 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . select Edit > Fill > Up (see Figure 1.22).

CSV. If you leave the Statistics dialogue open. 3. and Filtering Data" on page 56. or selected columns. 1. Tip: In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways. or by clicking the first cell. The context menu appears.24: The Statistics dialogue The statistics displayed depend on the type of numerical data selected. formats) and to MS Excel files. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 1. You can see how the exported table will appear in the Preview pane (see Figure 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 49 .25). Select the column data you want to analyse: To view a statistical analysis of an entire column: Click the column title.24).5. The contents of the Statistics dialogue are updated automatically. The entire column is selected. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Select Export from the context menu. Sorting. allowing you to select only certain data. you can view the statistical analysis of other cells by selecting them in the table. You can select non-contiguous cells by pressing CTRL and clicking each cell in the column separately. The Export dialogue appears.7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents You can view a statistical analysis of the contents of an entire column in a table or of the contents of a selection of cells. and Comma Separated Value. Right-click the table. 4. 2. The context menu appears. see "Grouping. Figure 1. Right-click the selection of cells. To view a statistical analysis of table contents: 1. 2.5. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last cell. to ASCII text files (in text. 3.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. TXT.8 Exporting Tables to Text Files You can export entire Atoll data tables. You can select contiguous cells by clicking the first cell and dragging to the last cell of the selection you want to analyse. To export a table: 1. To view a statistical analysis of a selection of cells in one column: Select the cells you want to analyse. For more information. Select Statistics from the context menu.

The next time you export a data table. you can click Load in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. In the Save As dialogue. Right-click the table. 1. To select a field to be exported. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. The fields at the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table. Multi-Hops. The context menu appears. to move it b. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. 8.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. select the field in the Available Fields box and click to the Exported Fields list. 9. For information on importing data into a data table. c. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields. Click Save to export the table. Select a Field Separator from the list. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. a.25: Exporting a data table 4. 50 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and Point to Multipoint tables to text files by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+E. Links. 10.5. Click Export. The Save As dialogue appears. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears.9 Importing Tables from Text Files You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into Atoll data tables. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. 5. enter the File name and select the format from the Save as type list. 2. 6. 7. To import a table: 1. select the field in the Exported Fields list and click to remove it. You can export the Sites. To change the order of the fields. Select the fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export.

Figure 1. 9. Note: Atoll compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the values in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist. 1. The values of these records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected.26: Importing information into a data table 5. See "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3.5. Select a Field Separator from the list.26). Select Import from the context menu. Under Field Mapping. there are two header rows: Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing. Click Import. The next time you export a data table. these records are not imported. The Open dialogue appears. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. Note: 10. For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table. If the Update Records check box is not selected. Tip: You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with.26). and Point to Multipoint tables by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+I. 6.10 Exporting Tables to XML Files You can export the data tables in your Atoll document to XML files. 8. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. The contents are imported in the current Atoll data table. you can click Load in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. 4. Links. You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Destination: The column headers from the Atoll data table. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Destination row and selecting the corresponding column from the Atoll data file (see Figure 1. You can import data from text files into the Sites. Select <Ignore> for source file columns that you do not want to import. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box. Multi-Hops. 7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 51 .

etc. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes.6 Printing in Atoll In Atoll. UMTS. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. both be printed in the same way. 1. To export all the data tables in your document to XML files: 1. see the Technical Reference Guide.5.6. etc.xml file because the order in which the data is imported is very important. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears.6. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Export.Atoll User Manual Atoll creates one XML file for each exported data table. and antenna patterns. some data must be imported before other data. document reports. 2. and a duplicate records check to ensure that the import did not create database problems. 3. antennas used by transmitters must be imported before the transmitters themselves. To import data tables into your document from XML files: 1. If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed..xml file that contains the mapping between the tables that were exported and the XML files corresponding to each data table. If you want to print only a selected area. 1. CDMA. Click OK. predictions. For more information about the formats of the XML files. data tables. During the import procedure. and the version of Atoll with which the XML files were created. 2. 2.xml file. Select the folder where the XML files are to be stored. Select File > Print. Once the import is complete. see "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. 3.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports Data tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in Atoll and can. This section explains the following: • • • "Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 52 "Printing a Map" on page 52 "Printing a Docking Window" on page 56 1. and the Atoll version used to create the XML files must be the same as the version used to import the data. 5. and an index. etc. Atoll performs a database integrity check.). Note: Tables are imported in the same order they appear in the index. If you want to print an area of the table. the technologyTDMA. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. the technologyTDMA. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. The data tables from the XML files listed in the index. . including A4 and A0.2 Printing a Map You can print a map in Atoll and create a paper copy of studies. CDMA. existing data in the tables are overwritten by the data from the XML files. . Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Import. choose Selected in the Print dialogue. select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally to the opposite corner. see the Technical Reference Guide. the XML files and the current Atoll document must use the same system (GSM. therefore. UMTS. etc. Click OK to print. 3. 52 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . etc. To print a table: 1. Click the Make New Folder button if you want to create a new folder to store the XML files. For example.xml file are imported in the document .xml file also stores the information on the system (GSM. For information on importing the data tables from XML files into your document. All the data tables in the document are exported to XML files. The index. Click OK. Select the folder where the index.). For information on exporting the data tables in your document to XML files. For more information about the formats of the XML files. In order for Atoll to be able to correctly import the data tables from XML files. see "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51. including maps. 1.11 Importing Tables from XML Files You can import data tables into your Atoll document from XML files. Do not modify the order of tables in the index.xml file is located. Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed map.. 4. see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55. you can print any part of your document.

it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. you have the following options: • You can print the entire map. visible objects on the Data tab. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account.): • • • • • • Points (vectors) Roads and Lines (vectors) Surface polygons (vectors) Multi-format maps . Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. sites. For performance reasons. are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. 2. 3.27). In the Explorer window. Objects in Atoll are arranged in layers. 5. and predictions. 2. You now have the following options before printing the map: You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). The printing zone is delimited by a light green line (see Figure 1. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). Before printing a map. Draw the printing zone: a. b.2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Before you print a map. Select the document window containing the map. 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Sites and transmitters must be above all the other layers. Before printing for the first time. To create a printing zone: 1. you should review the "Printing Recommendations" on page 53 to avoid any memory-related problems. 4. You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). The context menu appears. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). and others Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps) Images. Click OK. the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. and Transmitters. geoclimatic.6. When you release the mouse. Select Draw from the context menu. 4. 4. over predictions. If you clear the printing zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. For this reason. such as roads. The context menu appears. 1. or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways: • • Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53). lines (vectors such as roads. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites. 2. To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions: 1. or clutter height maps (non-transparent maps).2 Defining the Printing Zone You can define an area to be printed. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of these layers (for information on transparency. traffic maps (vector or raster).population. and points (measurements.2. Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. Antennas. transmitters. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Printing Zone folder. when a document contains surface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps). Click the Data tab. 3. Select File > Print. 3. This will ensure that these vector layers are visible when you print the map. 5. it is strongly recommended to put vector layers. or airport). Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). etc. click the Geo tab. however.1 Printing Recommendations The appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains. You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). for example. DTM. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu. To print a map: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 53 .6.

Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. you can import it and use it as a printing zone. the Components tab. You can also use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit the printing zone. You can see any changes you make in the schematic preview on the right side of the Print Setup dialogue. • Once you have created a printing zone.2. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. To define the appearance of the map when it is printed: 1. On the Print Setup dialogue. you can: • • • • • • Set the scale of the map. by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.6. you can click the Import button under Configuration to import those settings. These settings can be saved as a configuration. Note: You can export the printing zone as a polygon. Select File > Print Setup. or footer. as well as the page orientation and the margins. and the Header/Footer tab. 54 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1. For more information on the polygon editing tools. Choose to print the area outside the focus zone. Note: If you have previously defined a configuration file containing all the necessary settings. Select paper size and source. you can change its size by dragging the edges of the zone displayed on the rulers of the map window. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a printing zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Printing Zone from the context menu. You can import it by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.3 Defining the Print Layout You can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. You define the print set up on the Page tab. header. Choose to print the legend. logo. The Print Setup dialogue appears. allowing you to define a standard appearance which you can then import the next time you print a similar document. Choose to print the rulers with the map. Add a title. comment.27: Printing zone You can also create a printing zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the printing zone.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.

or by selecting Scale and defining the scale.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 2. If you want the header or footer to appear on the map (and not outside of it). Click the Page tab. the Source of the paper. Note: You can save the current settings as a configuration file by clicking the Export button under Configuration.bmp is present in this folder. or click Print to print the document. you can define the placement of the legend. data tables. iv. Click the Header/Footer tab. Click the Components tab. The buttons inside the square will place the legend on top of the map. or reports. ii. By default. select the Size of the paper and. b. d. v. b. The Logo dialogue appears. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. you can define the appearance of the printed map: Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it. Click File. select whether the page should be printed in Portrait or Landscape. 5.3 © Forsk 2010 Previewing Your Printing When you want to print maps. 1. i. margins. The graphics can be a company logo or other information. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels). select the On the map check box. iii. Select the Comments check box if you want to print a comment with the map and set its Position. On the Page tab. you can define graphics that appear for the map. such as copyright information. This enables you to re-use the same settings the next time by importing them. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open. in the form of a BMP graphic. 4. c. click OK to close the Print Setup dialogue. Select the Legend check box if you want to print a legend with the map. select the On the map check box. If your logo is in a different format. it is considered as the default header logo. you must first convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format. set the margins of the page in millimetres. c. If you want the comment to appear on the map (and not outside of it). Under Paper. b. a. 3. Note: Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. select the On the map check box. you can preview your printing. you can set the position of graphic elements. Atoll searches for the header and footer logos in the Atoll’s installation folder. If you want the title to appear on the map (and not outside of it). Select the Area inside focus zone only check box if you only want to print the part of the map inside the focus zone. Under Margins. The buttons outside of the square will place the legend outside of the map. Once you have made your settings. The Open dialogue appears. For the selected check box. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 55 . Under Scaling. - Click a Font button to open the Font dialogue to define the font of the legend. On the Header/Footer tab. you can select a different file. you can define the page size. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. Under Map.6. Select the Header/Footer check box if you want to define a header or footer for the map and set its Position. Click OK. click the Properties button. optionally. Click a button to set the Position of the legend. Under Orientation. If a file named logo. However. a. Select the Map Title check box if you want to define a title for the map and set its Position. Under Legend. c. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. Under Logo 1 and Logo 2. define the scale of the printed image either by selecting Fit to page. and orientation and the scale of the printed map: a.

modify only selected data or run calculations on the selected data. The docking windows whose contents you can print are: • • • • • Legend Window (for more information on this tool. 1.1. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. or filter data quickly by one criterion. click the tab of the study you want to print. This section explains: • • • "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 56 "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57 "Advanced Grouping" on page 58. At the top of the Print Preview window. you can click one of the following buttons: Click Print to open the Print dialogue. you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit properties on all grouped objects. For information. Right-click the window you wish to print. see "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. and Filtering Data In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways.7. 2. The Print dialogue appears. or by several. Click Next Page to display the following page Click Prev Page to display the previous page. sort.7 Grouping. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the data table because it puts all records with the selected property together. If you want to print a Point Analysis window. sort.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property You can group data objects by a selected property using the Group By command on the context menu. After you have defined how you will group. Click Zoom In to zoom in on the print preview. Select File > Print Preview. Atoll allows you to group. Click Zoom Out to zoom out on the print preview. for example. 56 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . In this section the following will be explained: • • • • • "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56 "Sorting Data" on page 60 "Filtering Data" on page 62 "Folder Configurations" on page 69 "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71 1. You can also define the properties by which you can group objects. 3. you can save this information as a folder configuration. 1. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration. The Print Preview window appears. or filter data.4 Printing a Docking Window You can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu. Select the map or table you want to print. as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 52. selecting File > Print only prints the contents of a document window.6. Click OK to print. Click Two Page to display two pages side by side Click One Page to display a single page. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24) Point Analysis Tool CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool. see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) To print the content of a docking window: 1. Sorting. The objects to be grouped can be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71). Open the docking window you want to print. For examples of grouping data objects. Select Print from the context menu. allowing you to select only certain data and then. 2. 1. Drive Test Data Analysis Tool Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool.1 Grouping Data Objects You can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window.7. see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.Atoll User Manual To preview your printing: 1. 4. Once you have grouped data objects.

see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. Figure 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The Group By submenu will now contain only the fields you selected. To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. 1. select from the Group By > None. 3. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The context menu appears. 2.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu Some data objects.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To group data objects by a selected property: 1. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure. To undo the grouping: 1. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group By submenu. 2. such as transmitters.28). 7. The context menu appears. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. The Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. For information on using the dialogue that appears. from top to bottom. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue.7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 57 . select the property by which you want to group the objects.1. 3. To change the order of the fields. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped.28: The Configuration dialogue 6. From the Group By submenu. To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu. To configure the Group By submenu: 1. See "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click to remove it. 3. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the properties that are relevant for grouping. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Grouping Fields list. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. From the context menu.

Select Classify by Site from the context menu. 1. The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1. The context menu appears. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. Figure 1. Select the fields by which you want to group the objects. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. 3.30).7. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Atoll creates subfolders for each site with a microwave link and sorts the links by site (see Figure 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 5. Right-click the Links folder. 2. To group microwave links by site: 1. The context menu appears. from top to bottom. 4. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.4 Advanced Grouping You can group data objects by one or more properties.29).7. To select a field to be used to group the objects. 4. 58 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Right-click the Links folder. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue.1.1. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Group these fields in this order list. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Select Properties from the context menu. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. 4. To change the order of the fields. Click the Group By button. select the field in the Group these fields in this order list and click to remove it. 3.30: The Group dialogue 6. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list. The default display of the contents of the Links folder is restored. Figure 1. To group data objects by one or more properties: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.3 Grouping Microwave Links by Site You can find all the microwave links that are connected to a specific site by grouping all links by site. 3.29: Grouping microwave links by site To restore normal display of microwave links: 1. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field.Atoll User Manual 1. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.

While it is easy to see on the map which transmitters are part of which site.32: Transmitters grouped by site © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 59 . 2.32.31: Grouping transmitters by site The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. you can group the transmitters by the site they are located on. select from the Group By > None. transmitters. Figure 1. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 3.31). there is an Atoll document with a large number of sites and. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. therefore.7. you can only see a very long list of transmitters under the Transmitter folder. in the Explorer window.1. 1. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Site (Figure 1. Figure 1.5 Examples of Grouping In this example. From the context menu.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 7. To undo the grouping: 1.

Figure 1. You can sort the data in ascending (A to Z. you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. within each group of identical values in the first column. you can sort by one column or by several columns. When you sort data by several columns.1 Sorting Data in Tables When sorting data in tables. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Polygon > Focus Zone (Figure 1.7.34: Transmitters grouped by site 1. For information. You normally create a computation or focus zone when you want to concentrate on a given subset of transmitters. 10 to 1) order.Atoll User Manual You can also group objects by the computation or focus zone.32. Atoll sorts the records by the first column and then. 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A. Figure 1.7.2. Atoll then sorts the records by the second column.31).2 Sorting Data In Atoll. By grouping them by computation or focus zone. the transmitters you are working on are immediately visible under the Transmitter folder. when you are working on a certain area of the network. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. 60 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .33: Grouping transmitters by zone The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. The transmitters are now in two groups: those inside the focus zone and those outside the focus zone. you can group the transmitters in the focus zone together. and so on. Once you have sorted data objects. you can save the settings as a folder configuration. for example. You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. This section explains the following: • • "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 "Advanced Sorting" on page 61 1.

Select the header of the column that you want to sort on. Click the Sort button.7. b. From the context menu. 2. If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent. 3.2. 4. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. 5. Sorting by Several Columns You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Sorting by One Column To sort data in a table by one column: 1. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highest value. The context menu appears. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. 3. 4. From the context menu. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references.2 Advanced Sorting You can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue. 6. 2. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61. For information. you can move the columns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 46. 1. The context menu appears 3.35). Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. The entire column is selected. Select the column name from the And by list. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 61 . Select the column name from the Sort by list. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. For the first column you want to sort on: a. The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1. The context menu appears. To sort data in a table by several columns: 1. 8. Right-click the column header. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. The entire column is selected. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highest value. Right-click the column headers. 7. you can use the Sort function on the Properties dialogue. 2. For each other column you want to sort on: a. To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue: 1. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Tip: If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowest value. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowest value.

Atoll User Manual Figure 1. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. This section explains the following: • • • • "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62 "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63 "Restoring All Records" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64. press CTRL as you click the other values. To select more than one value. Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection You can filter a data table by selecting one or more values. you can filter data according to one or several criteria.3. You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration.35: The Sort dialogue 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Once you have selected one or more values. For information. 3. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. Select one of the following from the Records menu: Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed. Select the value to filter on. 1.7.36 on page 62). - Figure 1.3 Filtering Data In Atoll. 2. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.37 on page 63). or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.7. you can choose to view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value.36: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209) 62 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To filter a data table on one or more fields: 1. The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria.

37: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209) 1. b. 2. The Filter dialogue appears. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 1. enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table: Formula =X <> X <X Data are kept in the table only if value equal to X (X may be a number or characters) value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters) numerical value is less than X © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 63 . Underneath each column name. select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. 3. Note: Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. Click the Filter tab: a. Tip: You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dialogue. Under Values to Include. Click the Advanced tab: a.38: The Filter dialogue . Select a Field from the list.2 Advanced Data Filtering You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. 4. To create an advanced filter: 1.3. Figure 1. you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select Records > Advanced Filter. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter.7. In the Column row.38).Advanced tab b.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes.

Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. as shown in Figure 1. Filters are combined first horizontally. 1.3 Restoring All Records After you have applied filter criteria to records. While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein"). Figure 1.3. you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again.4.40. To restore all records: • Select Records > Remove Filter.3. is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.4 Advanced Filtering: Examples In this section. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63): • The first criterion." The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100°. the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. 1.7. The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50°.Atoll User Manual Formula >X <=X >=X *X* X* Data are kept in the table only if numerical value is greater than X numerical value is less than or equal to X numerical value is greater than or equal to X text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5.1 Advanced Filtering: Example 1 In this example.7. • • The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidth under 100° but over 50°. you will find a few examples of advanced filtering: • • • "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Example 2" on page 65 "Advanced Filtering: Example 3" on page 65.39: Initial table The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. 64 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . it is not necessary because there is only one manufacturer with a "K.40. See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.7. To do this.3. 1. there is an Atoll document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics. then vertically.

The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.7. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. 1. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab.2 Advanced Filtering: Example 2 In this example. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. in this case. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 65 . however. in this case. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63). however.40. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition.40: Advanced filtering 1. However. or all antennas over 50°.3. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").41.3 Advanced Filtering: Example 3 In this example. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1.3. with "> 50" placed under "< 100". Figure 1. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.40.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. The resulting filter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100°. all antennas are displayed. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63).4.4. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1. because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100° and over 50°) is malformed.41: Errors in filtering As previously stated. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.42.

Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as the raster maps. height. and indoor loss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. is not stored in the database. If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database. The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor. transparency.). see the Administrator Manual. orthogonality factor. map display settings (such as. clutter description (code. name. However. 1. even if not saved). the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. tips text. and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display settings). etc. the filtering zone. Because a macro is linked to an Atoll session. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones are being exported in the user configuration file. You can create a user configuration file. such as geographic data. Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links. Atoll gives the file the extension "GEO. the information stored in a user configuration.42: Errors in filtering As previously stated. however. the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class. indoor loss. 66 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings. you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings in another document. • • For a detailed description of the user configuration file. • • Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document. the filter only generates an error message and no antennas are filtered out. Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file. you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an Atoll document open. Folder configurations: Sorting. because the second criterion is malformed. standard deviations. In this section. the coordinate system of any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data.4 User Configurations In Atoll." Because the file is in XML (eXtensible Markup Language). When you create a user configuration file. Macros: The complete path of any macros. the visibility scale. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67 "Importing a User Configuration" on page 67. to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same settings. default standard deviations.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. you can export the following information: • Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps. and not to a specific Atoll document.7.

Click Open. 1. The Save As dialogue appears. 2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1.4. or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed.7.7. To export a user configuration: 1. 3. as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. it into your current Atoll document.4. To import a user configuration: 1.1 Exporting a User Configuration You create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. 4. Figure 1. Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import. The Open dialogue appears.5 Site Lists In Atoll.44: Importing a user configuration 4. you can modify the list and use it to filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export.44).43: Exporting a user configuration 2. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration. you can create lists of sites.2 Importing a User Configuration You can import a user configuration that you or another user has created. Once you have created a site list. Click OK. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.7. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. Click OK. 5. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 67 . Select the check boxes of the information you want to import. 3. Figure 1. 1.43). The folder configuration has been saved. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. The user configuration is imported.

4 68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone You can add the sites contained in a zone to a site or transmitter list.5. To add a site to a list: 1. In a large radio-planning project.7. The site is added to the selected list. To add a site to a list: 1. Click OK.Atoll User Manual In a multi-user environment. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. right-click the site you want to add to a list. The selected site will be added to the new list. The context menu appears. 1. Click OK.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the map window. 3. A dialogue appears. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Tip: You can quickly create a complete list by first filtering the contents of the Sites folder as explained in "Filtering Data" on page 62. Enter the name of the new list in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). The Site Lists table appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Sites folder to expand the folder. The site is added to the selected list. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. Right-click the site you want to add to the list.7. 1. In the map window. you can add the filtered contents of folder to the list you select. A dialogue appears. site lists can be stored in the database. The context menu appears. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.1 Creating a Site List You can create lists of sites that you can then use to filter the data displayed. 1. 3. 3. Right-click the Sites folder. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Site List" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window" on page 68 "Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone" on page 68 "Editing a Site List" on page 69 "Filtering on a Site List" on page 69. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 4. this allows you to more effectively manage your resources by reducing the unnecessary data you retrieve from the database.5. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. In this section. by right-clicking the Sites folder and selecting Site Lists > Add Sites to a List from the context menu. When you open a document from a database. 5. The selected site will be added to the new list. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list.7. To create a site list: 1.5. 2. 1. b. Then. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 2. 2.5. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. you can select the sites to load according to any defined site lists. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to create a site list: a.7. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the Explorer window.

Select the check box of the list or lists that you want to display. Only sites that belong to the selected list are now displayed in the Data tab of the Explorer window and in the map window.6 Filtering on a Site List You can use site or transmitter lists to filter the contents of Sites folder. On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The Site Lists table appears.6 Folder Configurations In Atoll. To edit a site list: 1. b. 2. 2. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. click the Filter button. or filtered are referred to as a folder configuration. 5. The sites contained in the zone are added to the selected list.5.7. Press DEL to delete the site from the list. 5. 1. Click OK when you have finished editing the site list.5. The Properties dialogue appears.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add the sites contained in a zone to a list: 1. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. computation. 7. or sorting criteria. The Properties dialogue appears. A dialogue appears. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. Right-click the folder whose contents you want to filter. If you have created a list. the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. 3.5 Editing a Site List You can edit a site list using the Site List table. Create a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 that contains the sites you want to add to a list. right-click the zone and select the following from the context menu: Add Sites to a List: Select Add Sites to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list. Click OK to close the Filter dialogue. 3. You can use a filtering. 4. or geographic export zone. You can define folder configurations and save them. there will be an additional tab: Sites: Click the Site Lists tab. To delete a site from the list: a. printing.7. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to edit a site list: a. Click in the left margin of the row containing the site to select it. filtering. To filter folder contents using a site list: 1. 1. allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping. focus. In this section. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 69 . 1. Select the name of the list you want to edit and click Properties. 4. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Click OK. Right-click the Sites folder.7. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 71. The selected site will be added to the new list. The context menu appears. sorted. The Filter dialogue appears. 4. 6. b. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. You can now edit the list: To add a site to the list: Select the name of the site in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). 8.

you can export it as part of a user configuration to an external file.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration If you have grouped. the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. 70 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . so that it can be used in other documents. 6. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To export a folder configuration: 1. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Click Open.7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The Open dialogue appears. set the following parameters as desired: Group By (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). 3.7. 3.Atoll User Manual 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration You can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder.43 on page 67). If you want to export other configurations at the same time. you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. or sorted a data folder. Select the Folder Configuration check box. 2.7. 3. The folder configuration is applied to the current folder. click Save. 1. or sorted as a folder configuration.7. 3. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration. Under Configuration. 2. To reapply the folder configuration: 1.6. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.6. 5. 1. you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data.5 Importing a Folder Configuration Once you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70. you save it to the current ATL document. 1. Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save.1 Creating a Folder Configuration In Atoll.44 on page 67).4 Exporting a Folder Configuration When you create a folder configuration. To apply a saved folder configuration: 1. On the Configurations submenu. Select Properties from the context menu. you have created and applied a folder configuration. 2. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu. 1. 4. If you have not yet done so. select the name of the configuration you want to apply. To create a configuration: 1. In this case. filtered. 8. Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import. 2. Select the Folder Configuration check box. The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it from the Configurations submenu on the folder’s context menu.6. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue. filtered. select those check boxes as well. 3.6. 7. you can import it into your current document. To import a folder configuration: 1. 4. The folder configuration has been saved. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. If you then add or modify data. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. Click OK. However.7. The context menu appears. The Save As dialogue appears.6. The previously configured folder configuration is reapplied to the data. 2. 4.

The folder configuration is imported. or filtering settings. To compare subfolders: 1. 3.7 Creating and Comparing Subfolders You can compare the effects of different grouping. 5. To create a subfolder of a folder: 1. sorting. Caution: When you delete a folder configuration. or filtering settings. To delete a subfolder: • Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu. Under Configuration. Select Properties from the context menu. 6. The data objects of the selected subfolder. The folder configuration is deleted. 2. Atoll will not ask for confirmation. by displaying in turn each subfolder. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu. Tip: If.Chapter 1: The Working Environment If you want to import other configurations at the same time. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 71 . 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. When you delete a subfolder.7. clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of. sorting. leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared. 1. select the name of the configuration from the list. Click OK. 3. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. Select the check box of one of the subfolders. Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone In Atoll. the data reappear under the initial folder. You can remove subfolders by deleting them. The data objects are not displayed on the map. You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). For more information on display properties. it is deleted immediately.7. or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders in the Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. you can compare the differences. or filtering settings of the selected subfolder. 1.6. the data do not reappear under the initial folder. Click Delete. select those check boxes as well. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the object folder in which it was created. you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calculations. sorting. on the map. 1.7. the data contained are not deleted. depending on the different grouping. are displayed on the map. with its grouping. with its associated grouping. after deleting the last subfolder. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration You can delete a folder configuration from the Atoll document when you no longer need it. you can rename each one to give it a more descriptive name. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original folder content. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. 4. When you delete the last subfolder. Tip: If you have created several subfolders. 5. How the objects are displayed on the map will change. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. To delete a folder configuration: 1. sorting. you can refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. By limiting the number of sites. For information on renaming an object.

or links) by their name. coverage predictions. you can perform the following actions on the filtered data: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables. modifying the antenna azimuth. repeaters or remote antennas. repeaters. the Undo and Redo histories are erased. Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites. for example. you can undo or redo: • • Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating. pasting in tables. a microwave link. see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29. may not be actual. etc. you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with Atoll: • • • • • • • "Undoing and Redoing" on page 72 "Refreshing Maps and Folders" on page 72 "Searching for Objects on the Map" on page 72 "Using the Status Bar to Get Information" on page 73 "Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer" on page 74 "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74 "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75. • To undo an action: • Select Edit > Undo. or a vector by any text field. propagation models. transmitters. For example. 1. 1.8. you can search for a site. up to a maximum of 10 actions. or deleting a transmitter. You can refresh the display to get Atoll to reload the data and reapply the current configurations to folders. maps.1 Undoing and Redoing You can undo or redo most actions in Atoll. antennas. When you have applied a polygon filter.8 Tips and Tricks In this section. links. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( folder contents have been filtered. the data displayed on the map or in the Explorer window. You can search for some objects (sites. and moving a site. You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zone or you can draw a new filtering zone. for example.8.3. using the Find toolbar. deleting. a simulation. measurement paths.8. 72 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1.). ). On the Data tab of the Explorer window. Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name You can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name: • • sites microwave links.Atoll User Manual objects on the map clearer. transmitters. when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter. moving a transmitter. By using the Location Finder. This section explains: • • • "Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 72 "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73 "Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 73. To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map: • Click the Refresh button ( ) on the toolbar or press F5. 1. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a point on the map by its x and y coordinates. 1. To redo an action that you have undone: • Select Edit > Redo.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders Under certain circumstances. groups of hexagons. If you perform an action that can not be undone. to indicate that the For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone. a station or a group of stations.3 Searching for Objects on the Map Atoll provides several tools for finding data objects on the map.8.

select it and then select Delete from the context menu. You can use an asterisk ("*")as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* *X names which contain X names which start with X names which end with X 4. if available. select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. From the Find list. Click the Location Finder button ( 2. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. Under Criteria. 4. The Location Finder dialogue appears. 2. Atoll selects the object and centres it in the map window. The Location Finder dialogue appears. Atoll marks the point ( ) and centres it in the map window.e.8. 1. To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder: 1.3 Searching for a Point on the Map You can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder.8. using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tab of the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81). 3. Enter the name of the object in the Named box.8. Click OK. including sites that are presently filtered out. Click OK.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information Atoll displays the following information. ) on the toolbar. 4. non-numeric) property: • • • sites microwave links vectors.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property You can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i. 1. To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder: 1.. Press ENTER. You can use an asterisk as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5. From the Find list. If you wish to search all the sites in the search. or in the clutter classes).45): • • • • the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system) the altitude (as defined in the DTM) the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties) the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file.3. 1. Note: You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it. about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of the status bar (see Figure 1. 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 73 . Enter the x and y coordinates of the point. see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link 3. Note: To remove the point icon ( ). choose Point.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar: 1. For information. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link Vector 3. Note: You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder.3. From the Find list. select the Include all the sites in the search (filtered or not) check box. Atoll selects the site and centres it in the map window.

2. 6. 4. 3. The Save As dialogue appears. You can also automatically generate log files for each Atoll session and select the level of information displayed in the Event viewer. see the Administrator Manual. If the Event Viewer is not displayed. The context menu appears. For more information about these settings. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. and select a file type from the Save as type list. and error ( ) messages.45: Information displayed in the status bar 1. Right-click the select event(s). The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below: • In the Standard toolbar Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N) Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O) Save the current document (CTRL+S) Cut the selected data (CTRL+X) Copy the selected data (CTRL+C) Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V) Undo the last modification (CTRL + Z) Redo the previous undone modification (CTRL + Y) Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P) Preview the current window before printing (table or map) (CTRL+P) Open the About Atoll dialogue • In the Map toolbar Select area Refresh display of map and folders (F5) Disable zooming and panning tools.Atoll User Manual X-Y coordinates Altitude (from DTM) Clutter class Figure 1. Move the map window (CTRL+D) 74 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can save the information displayed in the Event Viewer in a log file.8. In the Save As dialogue. To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file: 1.8. warning ( ). select View > Event Viewer to display it. select a destination folder. Click OK. Click and drag to select several events.6 Using Icons from the Toolbar You can access many commands in Atoll by clicking its icon on the toolbar. The Event Viewer displays information ( ). enter a File name. 1.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer Atoll displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. 5. Select Save As. The selected events are saved in the text file. as well as the progress of calculations. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys (see "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75).

8. 1. giving a short description.7 Using Shortcuts in Atoll Atoll provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly. Currently selected microwave link model Activate the microwave link profile analysis window Show or hide victim and interferer links Show or hide site parities Stop the calculations in progress • In the Search toolbar Centre site in the map window. a tool tip appears. • In the Vector Edition toolbar Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab) Select the vector layer to edit Draw a new polygon Draw a new rectangle Draw a new line Draw points Merge several vector polygons Cut out areas in polygons Create new polygon from overlapping areas Split one polygon along the drawn lines. Note: When you place the cursor over an icon. Create a new multipoint microwave link.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Map scale currently used Previous/Next view (zoom and location) Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+R) Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W) Turn on tool tips Measure distances on the map Location finder Display a point-to-point profile • In the Microwave link toolbar Create a new microwave link. Create a new multi-hop microwave link. The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon. see "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 75 .

click ) ) ) CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification (in the toolbar. F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select ) • Using the Function Keys - Tip: Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the underlined letter in the menu or command name. click CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (in the toolbar. click CTRL+P: Print the current window (in the toolbar. click CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (in the toolbar. For more information. Multi-Hops. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder from a text file. click CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (in the toolbar. CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (in the toolbar. click CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (in the toolbar. click ) ) ALT+F8: Open the Add-ins and Macros dialogue F3: Select the Find Site tool. click CTRL+–: Zoom out on the map (in the toolbar. For more information. click ) ) and click the map) and right-click the map) CTRL+E: Export the table of the selected Sites. click CTRL+A: Select all records in a table CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (in the toolbar. click CTRL+SHIFT+N: Create a new document from an existing database CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (in the toolbar. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder to a text file. Multi-Hops. CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table CTRL+I: Import the table of the selected Sites. Links. click →: Next zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. Links. click CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification (in the toolbar. 76 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. click CTRL+D: In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells In the map window: Move the map window (in the toolbar. click ) ) ) ) ) • CTRL+S: Save the current active document (in the toolbar. click ) ) Using the ALT key: ALT+ ALT+ ←: Previous zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.Atoll User Manual • Using the CTRL key: CTRL++: Zoom in on the map (in the toolbar.

Chapter 2 Starting an Atoll Project .

Atoll User Manual 78 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document (see "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81). it may happen that one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. and other equipment. the database you connect to has been created with the technology and data you need. clutter heights. For more information onmicrowave data. see the technology-specific chapters. For more information on geographic data. see the technology-specific chapters. Atoll enables you to find the file and repair the link. When you open an existing project. Working with a database allows several users to share the same data while at the same time managing data consistency. In this chapter. For information on creating a document from a template. Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology. making the changes necessary to meet your own needs and then saving it as a new template. For example. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template. population maps. technology-specific parameters. as part of a complete mobile telecommunications network. Once you have started your new Atoll project.2 Creating an Atoll Document Whatever the radio technology you will be modelling.2.2. 2. As well. certain geo data or antennas. coordinate systems. the tabs in the transmitter Properties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project. depending on the database containing the data. this template is provided to enable you to create a project of only microwave radio links. For example. For more information on equipment. • From an existing database: When you create a new Atoll document from a database. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84. from any technology template. WiMAX.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2 Starting an Atoll Project When you want to start a new project. UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRX are only available in GSM-TDMA documents. you create an Atoll document in one of two ways: • From a document template: You can create a new Atoll document from a template. you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for the technology you are using. Atoll can work with several common databases. you can modify the network parameters to meet your particular needs. you can create the Atoll document. you can select it from the File menu if it is one of the last projects you have worked on. the following are explained: • • "Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project" on page 79 "Creating an Atoll Document" on page 79. Atoll has a template for each technology you will be planning for. You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customised with. However. for example. For information on starting a document from a database. The actual templates supplied depend on the modules included with your Atoll installation. 2. antennas. or you can open it from the Open dialogue.1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project For every microwave-planning project you must assemble the information necessary: • • • Microwave equipment: sites. microwave radio links. UMTS HSPA. Geographic data: clutter classes. see "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project". Atoll is delivered with a template for each technology you will be planning for. 2. and LTE. the following are explained: • • • "Templates Available" on page 79 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80 "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81 2. DTM.1. In this section. the objects that are available are appropriate for the technology. the following templates are available: • Microwave Radio Links: Atoll allows you to model microwave radio links. etc. Several templates are supplied with Atoll: GPS GPRS EGPRS. Once you have selected the appropriate template for your microwave-planning project. Microwave data: frequency bands.1 Templates Available Depending on your configuration of Atoll. Once the necessary data have been assembled. Because Atoll can work with linked geographic data files. CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. etc. TD-SCDMATD-SCDMATD-SCDMA • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 79 .1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template You can create a new Atoll document from a template. The exact procedure for creating a new Atoll document from a database differs. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 79.

The dialogue in Figure 2. respectively. These can be modified or replaced. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK. Select File > New > From a Document Template.46 shows a new Atoll document based on the UMTS HSPA HSPA template. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS HSPA HSPA radio-planning project. folders for UMTS HSPA HSPA parameters and UMTS HSPA HSPA simulations. Atoll creates a new document based on the template selected.49 appears.47 and Figure 2.46: New Atoll document based on a template Figure 2. The Project Templates dialogue appears. the document is not connected to a database. 2. among other UMTSUMTS-specific elements.48 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document. Figure 2. with.47: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2. 80 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual 2. To verify whether the document is connected to a database: • Select File > Database > Connection Properties.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template To create a new document from a template: 1. The Antennas folder is expanded to show the UMTSUMTS-compatible antennas suggested by Atoll.48: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a template. Figure 2. Figure 2.2.1.

3 Defining a New Atoll Document Once you have created a new Atoll document as explained in "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80. Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey. In this section.49: An Atoll document based on a template is not connected to a database 2. A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet.3. the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. you define the two coordinate systems for each Atoll document: the projection coordinate system and the display coordinate system. thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance. The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections. Snyder. etc.2. You can accept the default values for some parameters. 2nd Edition.50.C. The projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter. Two projection systems are widely used: • The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually secant at one or two standard parallels. the following are explained: • • • "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81 "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82 "Setting Measurement Units" on page 82 2. the same coordinate system is used for both. direction. The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic data files. The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). yard. Atoll distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display. This projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south.. a database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. The map shows the French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system (coordinates in metres). Atoll has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references. In Figure 2. such as basic measurement units. you can see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system. or he must compromise on several characteristics1. This projection cannot be done without distortion. but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 81 . P.2. 313 pages. thus. By choosing a specific display system. Washington. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document.1. 1982. On the other hand. By default. but you must set projection and display coordinate systems.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2. the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds). • A geographic system is not a projection. D. 1. scale.. United States Government Printing Office.1. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that lay primarily east to west. John.1 Projection and Display Coordinate Systems In Atoll. area or shape) which is to be shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics.). You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automatically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map.

click the Browse button ( tems dialogue appears. to step 5. only cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. in the Display field as well. Click OK. click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Display field and repeat step 3.2 Setting a Coordinate System Because you are working with maps.3. Atoll sets certain measurement units for reception. For the display system. 6.50: NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system used with WGS 72 system Notes: All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. To define the coordinate system: 1. If not.4 Setting Measurement Units When you create a new Atoll document. For example: • • • • 26°56’29. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue. On the Coordinates tab.3. you must set a coordinate system for your Atoll document.9’’N 26d56m29. 5.3. transmission. Click OK. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display.2. On the Coordinates tab.2. The Coordinate Sys- 3. 4. Select Tools > Options. but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish. Note: The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems. The Options dialogue appears. 2.93914N +26. Tip: If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favourites by clicking Add to Favourites. 2. Select a coordinate system from the list. by default. projection and display coordinate systems are the same. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and. 2.1. and offset to internal defaults. For the projection system. select a catalogue from the Find in list.3 Selecting the Degree Display Format Atoll can display longitude and latitude in four different formats. you must convert them to a single cartographic system. distance.1.2. 2. 82 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .1. select the format from the Degree Format list. ) to the right of the Projection field. By default. Select Tools > Options. 3.93914 To change the degree display format: 1. The Options dialogue appears. height. You can accept these default measurement units.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.9sN 26. or you can change them using the Options dialogue. 2. both cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available.

Through this central Atoll project. for example. and archive their modifications in the database. since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users. can be detected and resolved. Once the database is in place. thus ensuring access to the database by other users. When you create a new Atoll document from a database.2. the Atoll administrator can manage all the data shared by all the individual Atoll users or groups of users. large (may be nation-wide) network.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment A multi-user environment is one where a number of users. you are working on data that you are sharing with other users. users can modify their projects. • - • User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon and managed by each user. for example). so as to minimise the size of the Atoll file. they are usually linked to an Atoll file. It is initiated through the central Atoll project by the administrator.1 The Atoll Multi-User Environment An Atoll multi-user environment consists of the following elements. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users. modified or deleted records. The connection to the reference database is reactivated only when necessary. connected over a network: • A central Atoll project: The central Atoll project can only be accessed. the following are explained: • • • • • "The Atoll Multi-User Environment" on page 83 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84 "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 "Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database" on page 86 "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87.2. When you work on a document created from a database. select the desired unit for the following measurements: Reception Transmission Distance Height and offset 3. On the Units tab. and updated by the Atoll users and the administrator. the changes you have made may occasionally interfere with changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict. 2. The Options dialogue appears. modified. In this section. and is then subdivided into sections on which users or groups of users can work simultaneously. and updated by the Atoll administrator. The shared data are mainly of the following three types: The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the Atoll user documents.e. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 83 .Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project To set the measurement units: 1. Since geographic data files are usually large. worked on. work simultaneously on given parts of a single. Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fast access connection. they are stored externally. Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of the network. 2.2. Atoll loads the data to which you have rights from database into your new document and then disconnects it from the database.. Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central Atoll project and are then accessed. and have access to the shared path loss matrices folder. Select Tools > Options. load only the required part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file. modified. when you archive your changes to the database. refresh their projects from the data stored in the database. usually store these modifications locally. Consequently. there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document. for example. Users who modify geographic data locally. User documents are Atoll files which are connected to the central database. Click OK. i. This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose. editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects. 2. For example. or groups of users.

2.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database When you create a new document from a database. Then the connected is interrupted. The Data to Load dialogue appears.2.Atoll User Manual Figure 2. a dialogue may appear where you can enter your User Name. allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85). select the option corresponding to the type of your database. 84 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and Server. you must connect to the database. The Open from a Database dialogue appears. Note: Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load or which site list to load.51: Components of Multi-user Environments Note: For information on creating and maintaining the database. Atoll loads the database into a new Atoll document. 3. An example of a new Atoll document created from a database is shown in: • "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 2. "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85. Once connected. see the Administrator Manual.2. 2. A new connection with the database will be created only when necessary.2.1 Connecting to a Database To create a new document from a database: 1. In the Files of type list. The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another.2. Atoll can work with the following databases: • • • • • Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Microsoft Data Link files The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data: • • "Connecting to a Database" on page 84. Click OK. Depending on the type of the database. Select File > New > From an Existing Database.2. in order to allow other users access to the database. Password.

You can select which Project. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project. These can be modified or replaced. you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create the document in the Data to load dialogue.2 Selecting the Data to Load From the Database When you create a new document from a database. and Neighbour to load.2. rightclicking on any site. Custom Fields Groups. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 85 . You can re-centre the document on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder. such as sites.2. This is because the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin.54 and Figure 2. If you load the intra-technology or the inter-technology neighbour list.2.53: New Atoll document opened from a database Note: The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window.2. unlike a document created from a template. Figure 2.55 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document. Site List.53 shows a new Atoll document based created from a database. Figure 2. and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu.2. respectively.3 Working With a Document on a Database Figure 2. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a document created from a database can have additional data. Atoll will also load the associated exceptional pairs table. Figure 2.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2.52: Selecting the data to load 2.

56). Caution: If you disconnect your document from the database. you should refresh your document frequently as well. How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated. If the database is updated frequently. The Database Connection dialogue appears (see Figure 2. in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data. The Refresh dialogue appears. you can do one of the following if you have modified your document but have not yet saved those changes in the database: Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server instead of refreshing your document from the server. it will be become a stand-alone document and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database As you are working on your document. you can view the characteristics of the database connection. - Modify your connection to the database. For information on using the Archive dialogue. the Archive dialogue appears.54: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2. Select File > Database > Refresh From the Database.55: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a database.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.2. If you chose Archive your changes in the database. Select File > Database > Connection Properties. 2.56: The Database Connection dialogue 2. Figure 2.2. In the dialogue. Atoll proceeds without asking for confirmation. 2. You can now: Disconnect your document from the database. To refresh an Atoll document from the database: 1. To view the characteristics of the database connection: 1. You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database. see "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. 86 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data. Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have made and start over from the point of the last archive to the database. Notes: • • If you chose Refresh unmodified data only or Cancel your changes and reload database. Refresh unmodified data only: This option allows you to refresh from the database only those items that you have not modified in your document.

The report lists all the modifications (deletions.2. you can select the neighbour lists. transmitters. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2. cells. the number of other users using the database who may benefit from your modifications.2. you can have read access to the antennas table. additions. you can archive only some of them or even undo modifications you have made locally. Atoll creates a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format in the temporary files system folder. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project. Figure 2. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology you are working with. to refresh. The Atoll archiving process is flexible. the following are explained: • • • "Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 87 "Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 87 "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. Click OK. because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas.57). and neighbours. Occasionally. 4. 2. When you are finished archiving.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 3. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. the site-related data are: sites. you can generate a report for the refresh process. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. 2. 2. The document is refreshed according to the selected options. 4. Atoll shows you all modifications that will be archived and. when you are archiving. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. For example. Under Modifications Since the Last Refresh. In this section.2. and updates) that were stored in the database since the last time you refreshed or opened your document.2. 2. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given to you. and opens it. Atoll will inform you of the possible conflicts and help you resolve them. allowing you to create a new Atoll document with the given antennas. Under Take into account. Intra-technology Neighbours and Inter-technology Neighbours. For example. when you archive your changes. You can then rename the file and save it where you wish. you will not be able to archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table. In the Archive dialogue.2. other users might have modified some of the same data and.5.57: The Archive dialogue 3. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database.5. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 87 . If you selected to generate a report.2. 5. if you wish. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed. etc.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database Atoll allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. You can archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifications. you should from time to time archive the modifications you have made to the data on the database.1 Archiving All Modifications in the Database To archive all your modifications in the database: 1. How frequently you should archive your document depends on several factors: the amount and size of changes you make. For information on managing conflicts.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database When you are working on an Atoll document that is attached to a database. As well. click Close. However.

the procedure to resolve the conflict is the same. the archiving process stops. 2. Atoll ignores items causing conflicts in the table being archived.59). There are two different types of data conflicts: On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. • • Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately. it displays the warning shown in Figure 2.58. Atoll allows you to resolve data conflicts. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve. For information on managing conflicts. Ignore All: If you click Ignore All. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data. if conflicts are found in other tables. The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears. The Archive dialogue appears. 4. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. archives all other modifications in the table. However. However. You can attempt to resolve conflicts before restarting the archiving process. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. In the Archive dialogue. 2. A conflict is caused only by differences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current Atoll document. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue.5. To resolve data conflicts one by one: 1. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. and continues with the next table. Figure 2. When Atoll finds a conflict. as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column.3 Resolving Data Conflicts Atoll enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database for other users. or wait until the end of the archive process. click Close. When the second user attempts to archive his changes. Atoll ignores all items causing conflicts in all tables being archived. Atoll warns him that the data have been changed since he last refreshed the data and that there is a conflict. Atoll will warn you with the Database Transfer Error dialogue again. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. and archives all other modifications. with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2. 88 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual To archive only the site-related data in the database: 1.58: Conflict warning You have three options: • Ignore: If you click Ignore. When you are finished archiving. In the Conflict in Changes dialogue. 3. you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values column.2.2. Abort: If you click Abort.

Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. 2. 2. Atoll displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the database (see Figure 2.60: Conflict on a deleted record Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications in the database. clear the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive.59: The Conflict in Changes dialogue If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document. overwriting the value there. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain unchanged. No: Select No to overwrite the modifications made by other users in the database with the values from your document. For information. - - On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. Important: You should only resolve all the data conflicts when you are certain about the modifications. To resolve all the data conflicts: 1. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. Atoll displays a message explaining how Resolve All works (see Figure 2.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2. thereby recreating the deleted record.60). Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel.61: Resolving all the data conflicts simultaneously Yes: Select Yes to accept all the modifications made by other users in the database and update your document with values from the database. Select one of the following: Figure 2. Select one of the following: Figure 2.61). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 89 . select any conflict and click Resolve All. No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document. Your modification will be written to the database. select the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. If you want to accept the value of the field in the database.

Enter a time interval.63). When you have activated automatic backup. Atoll prompts you each time before backing up the document. between consecutive backups in the Automatically save backups every text box. Atoll proceeds to back up all open documents. If you selected the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box. you can optimise the process by opening large documents in separate Atoll sessions. 3. this operation can take a long time.. 5. If you open two large documents in the same Atoll session.62: Automatic backup configuration dialogue 2. the following are explained: • • "Configuring Automatic Backup" on page 90 "Recovering a Backup" on page 91. the timer is reset to 0. Atoll creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. In this section.atl.3 Making a Backup of Your Document Atoll can create and automatically update backups of documents you are working on. 4. To configure automatic backup: 1. Atoll automatically creates a backup for every document open. Therefore. instead of in the same Atoll session. coverage predictions or simulations.62). Figure 2. Click OK. You can also configure Atoll to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an option in the atoll.Atoll User Manual 2. each document will have its own 2 GB allocated memory. The timer starts again once the calculations are over. Figure 2.63: Automatic backup prompt The automatic backup timer is stopped while the prompt is displayed. Note: It can take a long time to back up large documents. for a document named "filename. Select File > Configure Automatic Backup. in minutes. see the Administrator Manual. 4 GB under 64-bit operating systems) memory allocation. If you are performing calculations. 2. For example. Atoll skips the backup once. If you click OK. You can define the update interval each time you start Atoll. This also improves memory management because each instance of Atoll has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems. Consequently.atl.bak" in the same folder as the original document. If you click Cancel. 90 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .3.e.1 Configuring Automatic Backup You can set up automatic backup for each Atoll session. However. these documents will use the same 2 GB memory pool. you should set a correspondingly larger interval between backups when working with large documents in order to optimise the process. the automatic backup is delayed until the calculations have ended. i. If you save the original document manually.ini file. For more information. Select the Activate automatic backup check box. The Automatic Backup Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 2. if you have a lot of documents open. Atoll displays a message in the Event Viewer every time a backup file is updated." Atoll will create a backup file called "filename. Once you have saved the document. If you open them in two different Atoll sessions. Select the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box if you want Atoll to ask you before saving the back up of your file every time (see Figure 2.

This folder contains subfolders with the same names as the folders on the Geo tab. it creates the subfolders required for extracting the contents of the Geo folder. you can open it directly from Atoll without first having to extract it using another tool. If the geographic data files linked to the document are located on a remote computer. If the original document was named "filename. A "Geo" folder with all the linked geographic data available on the Geo tab of the Explorer window for the Atoll document. If necessary.atl. 2. memory consumption. 3. It is. Atoll extracts all the files from the archive to the selected folder. Often these geographic data files are quite large." Important: If you just remove the BAK extension. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the backup was saved.bak". such as a file server over a network. Select File > Open from Zip. Select the ZIP file that contains the ATL file and linked geographic data files.atl.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. For example. Select File > Save to Zip. 3. enter a File name for the archive to be created. navigate to the folder containing your original Atoll document and its backup. 2. Geographic data that are found outside folders on the Geo tab are stored in files under the Geo folder.2 Recovering a Backup You can easily recover your backup document and open it in Atoll just like any other Atoll document. therefore. Externally stored path loss matrices are not added to the archive because they are not necessary for making a portable document because they can be recalculated based on the network and geographic data in the ATL file. Click Open. To open an archive containing an ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. 2. and it is not feasible to embed these files in an ATL file due to file size. The pathloss.dbf file and a LowRes subfolder which contains the pathloss. 4.atl. and performance reasons.dbf file corresponding to the extended path loss matrices." the backup document will be in the same folder and will be called "filename. To recover your backup document: 1. Click OK. Select the folder where you want to extract the contents of the ZIP file.).4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects You can create portable Atoll documents in two ways: • • by embedding all the geographic data in the ATL file. The Save As dialogue appears. To make an archive containing the ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. Once Atoll has finished extracting files from the archive. more useful to make a project portable by creating an archive that contains the ATL and all geographic data files. geographic data files are stored on a common file server and are linked to the ATL documents of different users over a network.zip)" from the Save as type list. The ATL file added to the archive contains all the data that might be embedded in it (path loss matrices. geographic data. Rename the document and remove the BAK extension. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 91 . Therefore.3.dbf files are stored in the archive because they are needed when reopening the archive in Atoll. coverage predictions. Atoll creates a ZIP file containing: A copy of the ATL file with the same name as the name of the archive (ZIP file). your backup file will have the same file name as the original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file. they are first copied to the local computer in the Windows’ temporary files folder and then added to the archive. Once the portable archive is created. Geographic data extracted from the archive are linked to the ATL file. The Browse For Folder dialogue appears. The Open dialogue appears. Using Windows Explorer. it opens the extracted ATL file. Open the renamed backup document in Atoll. you could change the name to "filename-backup. it is safer to give a new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is most recent. measurement data. etc. Select the folder where the created archive is to be stored. and select "Zip Files (*. and data present within folders on the Geo tab are stored inside their respective folders. In most working environments. 5. Atoll lets you make an archive containing the ATL file and all geographic data directly from the File menu. A ". or by creating a compressed archive (ZIP file) containing the ATL file and all geographic data linked to the Atoll document. 2.losses" folder containing a pathloss. simulation results.

The highest compression level is used when creating the archive. installed on the computer for this feature.Atoll User Manual Notes: • • You do not need to have a compression utility. 92 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . such as WinZip or WinRAR.

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data .

Atoll User Manual 94 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Atoll supports a wide range of file formats for geographic data files. When you import a geo data file into Atoll. lines. Therefore. You can also create raster-based geographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes. you can decide in which folder it goes. Lines. clutter classes. Other types such as scanned images. and Points" on page 96 "Scanned Images" on page 96 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 96 Digital Terrain Model The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. lines. scanned images. 3. You can export most geo data objects (for example. Some data types. The different geographic data types play different roles in the Atoll document: • Geographic data used in propagation calculation: • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Images from web map services (WMS) Contours. or vector layers) for use in other Atoll documents or in other applications. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value. You can also create and edit geographic data. roads. and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data that you can import or create. raster polygons. or regions. through the process of saving them. choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can add contours. Once you have imported a file into the Atoll document. You can also create your own data type by importing a file and defining what data is to be used. or points. you can edit the data. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 95 . are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study. The Geo tab of the Atoll Explorer window has folders for the commonly used data types. Lines. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). and points representing. Atoll also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type. create new geographic data. Geographic data used for display purposes: In this section. railways. clutter heights. or by importing them directly to the Data tab. discrete values. the following data types are described: • • • • • • "Digital Terrain Model" on page 95 "Clutter Classes" on page 95 "Clutter Heights" on page 96 "Contours. for example. define how the geo data will be displayed. clutter heights. and Points" on page 106 "Scanned Images" on page 107 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108 "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109 "Editing Geographic Data" on page 113 "Saving Geographic Data" on page 116. This enables you to update the original files and. recompact the file. You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files. You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab. Atoll also allows you to save changes you make to geo data objects back to the original files. or modify existing data. can be used to give more realistic calculations. clutter classes. The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM).Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3 Managing Geographic Data Several different geographic data types are used in an Atoll document. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Geographic Data Types" on page 95 "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96 "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96 "Clutter Classes" on page 103 "Clutter Heights" on page 106 "Digital Terrain Models" on page 103 "Contours. DTM. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagation model during computations. deciding the priority of data files with different information or different resolutions.1 Geographic Data Types An Atoll document can contain several different geographic data types. Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. either by transferring them to the Data tab. such as clutter classes.

vapour density. Clutter heights can also be defined by a separate clutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 96). and TAB. BMP (1 to 24-bit). MIF. As explained in "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. You can 96 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . SHP. road maps or satellite images. or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. or lines such as roads or coastlines. they have no effect on calculations. BMP (8-bit). Traffic data maps are used for network capacity analyses. Planet. Planet. and TAB. BMP (8-bit). BIL (8 or 16-bit). Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit). BIL (16-bit). A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map. BMP (8-bit). IST (16-bit). or points. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). Planet. GRC Vertical Mapper (8-bit). DXF. When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map. Planet. IST (8 or 16-bit). Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD. JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit). lines. clutter altitude is taken from the clutter height map. AGD. Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit). and ECW (8 or 24-bit) JPEG 2000 (16-bit). BMP (16-bit). Caution: All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system. Atoll recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Erdas Imagine (16-bit). DFX. Contours. Traffic Data Maps Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. it is possible to have different heights within a single clutter class. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are used only for display. JPEG 2000 (1 to 24-bit). and refractivity. SHP. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. When you import a new geo data file. MIF. GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). however.3 Importing Geo Data Files You can import the geographic data you need into the current Atoll document. Note: The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model. the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. SHP. in a clutter height file. and TAB. MIF. You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value. DFX. GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit). Clutter height maps can offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. Geoclimatic files in the following formats: AGD. For information on defining the height per clutter class. SHP. and Points Atoll supports contours. Lines.Atoll User Manual Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. JPEG 2000 (8-bit). and TAB. Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit). IST (8 or 16-bit). BIL (1 to 24-bit). 3. GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). • • 3. IST (8-bit). Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. temperature. and points to represent polygons such as regions. discrete values. and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit). Planet.. and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. for example. IST (1 to 24-bit). DXF. MIF. BIL (8-bit). and Erdas Imagine (8-bit) Vector data files in the following formats: AGD. JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). Contours can also be used to create filtering polygons or computation or focus zones. Planet. BIL (8 or 16-bit). Planet. see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. JPEG 2000 (16-bit).2 Supported Geographic Data Formats Atoll supports the following geographic data formats: • • • • • • DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit).

Note: If the Vector Import dialogue appears. Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. The total percentages must equal 100. select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink.64). Select File > Import. Click Import. Under Terminals (%). Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. or only in the Uplink. 2. Under Clutter Distribution. By default. Under Mobilities (%). 3. The Open dialogue appears.3. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 4. enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. c.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data embed geo data files in the Atoll document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). providing that the geo data files are of the same type. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. For information on embedding files. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Click Open. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 97 . The format is automatically recognized and Atoll presents you with the appropriate dialogue. The total percentages must equal 100. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. d. The total percentages must equal 100. 5. select the Embed in Document check box. f. b. only in the Downlink. For information on exporting the paths of your document’s files or to import the path from another document using user configuration files. For UMTS and CDMA. This section explains the following: • • • • • • "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97 "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98 "Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data" on page 99 "Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 101 "Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 102 "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. Under Services (%). the traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears: a. go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98. e.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the Atoll document itself. 3. To import a geographic data file in a raster format: 1. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. Click OK. You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using Atoll’s user configuration files. Select the geo data file you want to import. see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112. choose one of the following options: DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list. When you import a traffic data map. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file. Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list. Tip: You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. To embed the data file in the Atoll document.

Population: ii. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. To import a vector-format geographic data file: 1. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.64: Importing a clutter class file 3. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. Under Fields to be imported. Note: If the File Import dialogue appears. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. and the second list lets you select whether the attribute corresponds to population density or to a number of inhabitants.Atoll User Manual Figure 3.66: Population values (number of inhabitants per item – polygon/road/point) 98 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97.66).2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File When you import geo data files in vector format. providing that the geo data files are of the same type. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file. choose one of the following options: Vector Data: i. Figure 3. their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the Atoll document. or number of inhabitants per kilometre for lines) or a Value (number of inhabitants) (see Figure 3. Select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre for polygons. Click Open. Select Geo from the Import to list.65 and Figure 3.3. 2.65: Population density (number of inhabitants/km²) Figure 3. Select the geo data file you want to import. iii.67). the first list contains the attributes of the population vector data file that you are importing. Select Population from the Import to list. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears.

see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Geoclimatic File: i. select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value from the second list. by importing the corresponding index file. Select File > Import. by importing several index files. or you can import several MSI Planet® geo data files at the same time. ii. The index file is in ASCII text format and contains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file. Figure 3. 3. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. By default. You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vector files.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type When you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet® geo data. such as a DTM or clutter heights. Rectangles are interpreted as polygons.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data MSI Planet® geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files. 2.3. 3. 5. you import the index file containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data. To import one type of MSI Planet® geo data: 1.3. Under Fields to be imported. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. when you import a vector file. For more information about defining the mapping between coordinate systems. The Open dialogue appears. Atoll can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. This section explains the following: • • "Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type" on page 99 "Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database" on page 100. you can import each type of geo data separately. This way.67: Vector Import dialogue Notes: • • You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB).3. For information on embedding files. Click Import. select the Embed in Document check box. 4.68). The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. and Atoll. defined in the corresponding MIF/PRJ files. Select Geoclimatic Parameters from the Import to list. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 99 . When you import MSI Planet® geo data. please refer to the Administrator Manual.

select the Embed check box. The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (see Figure 3. The Open dialogue appears. click OK. The path and name of the file appears in the corresponding field of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue.69: Importing an MSI Planet® database 3.3. For each type of data that you want to import: a.Atoll User Manual Figure 3.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database You can import all available MSI Planet® geo data at the same time by importing all index files. If you want to embed the data. Select the corresponding check box b. Select "Planet® database" from the Files of Type list. click . The data is imported into the current Atoll document. Select File > Import. 3. Select the MSI Planet® index file and click Open. 100 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . d. 4.69). Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data in the current Atoll document.3. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import.68: Importing an MSI Planet® index file 3. c. 2. Figure 3. Click OK to import the geo data into the current Atoll document. To import the MSI Planet® geo database: 1. The Open dialogue appears. To locate the MSI Planet® index file. 4.

If desired. Select File > Import. 6. Geographic Coordinates: The geographic coordinates are the WMS data are given. The image is imported by reference into the Atoll document. The Web Map Import dialogue appears. or the image group. The image will be referenced in the document. Select the URL of the WMS server from the Server URL list or enter it directly.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. The files you want to import appear in the right pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue.. you can place the least transparent image towards the bottom so that the other images imported at the same time remain visible. i. a group preceded by an Expand button ( ).70: The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue 5. Click the Connect button. From the Files of Type list. you can modify this name. such as roads. The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue appears. The Open dialogue appears. Before you import them. select Connection to a Web Map Services server.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File You can import raster images from a Web Map Service (WMS) server into your Atoll document. All images imported at the same time are imported as a single image. You can not embed a WMS image in your document. The image must be in TIF format. see the Administrator Manual.3. 2. The Name suggested is the name of the lowest layer to be imported. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 101 . Before importing an image from a WMS server. the Lambert Conformal-Conic or the Universal Transverse Mercator projection) can be imported.70 on page 101). Or. Figure 3.e. The following information is given about the imported WMS data: Data Types: "Image or Scan" is selected. 11.ini file. Note: The list of WMS servers that appears in the Server URL list are defined by entries in the atoll. it can not be embedded. Select either the image you want to import. 8. Note: You can remove an image or group of images from the images to be imported by selecting it in the right pane and clicking . you must ensure that the coordinate system used in your document is the same projection system supported by the server. Only WMS data mapped with a projection system (for example. 9. Click for each image you want to import. The images will be imported as a single object and their appearance will depend on the order you define here. 4. you can arrange them by placing on top the image that is the most important. 3. Atoll connects to the URL of the WMS server and displays the information available along with a description of the service (Figure 3. 7. Arrange the order in which you want the images to appear by selecting each image in the right pane and clicking to move it towards the top or to move it toward the bottom. To import a geographic data file from a web map service: 1. For information on defining these entries. In the left pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as that used by the Atoll document itself. navigate to the item you want to import by clicking the Expand button ( ) to open each level. 10. Click Import.

Select Properties from the context menu. When you import the next geo data file. either when you import it or later. To embed a geo data file in the current Atoll document while you are importing: • Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box. or vice versa. 4. however. however. If. Your file is imported into the newly created folder. Once grouped. The next time you open an Atoll document with the linked geo data file. If the file to be imported is a vector file. Atoll cannot find the file and displays the error message shown in Figure 3. You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it. You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import. when you import a geo data file. Select the geo data file and click Open. Note: You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab. are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder.5 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders By default. and points. Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK. their own individual display settings.71.3.6 Embedding Geographic Data By default. select New folder in Geo. Important: If you are using distributed calculations. however. they appear directly on the Geo tab. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. For more information. Atoll creates a link to the file. You can. Click Embed. see the Administrator Manual. The New Folder dialogue appears. 3. For information. 6. 3. you must link your geo data files. When the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document.67). From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue). Click Import. Atoll imports the group as a single object.7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File By default. the link will be broken. Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer to Geo. To create a new geo data folder when importing: 1. When Atoll is linked to a geo data file. the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document. it is saved as part of the document. You can. you can import it directly into the new folder. the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 102 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .3. either raster or vector. these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. such as clutter classes. you can select New folder in Data. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. If you want to remove one of the images or add another one you will go through the import process again. The Open dialogue appears. 2. however. lines. group scanned images and contours. Select File > Import. They retain. 5. the geo data file is moved. lines. 3. Note: If you want to import your file to the Data tab. 4. choose to embed the geo data file in your Atoll document. when you import scanned images and contours. Other data files. Click OK. and points into folders as well. 3.3. 3. If the file to be imported is a raster file. Distributed calculations can not work with embedded geo data files.64). the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. see the Administrator Manual. The geo data file is now embedded in the current Atoll document. You can not modify this object. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. 5. Atoll creates a link to the file.Atoll User Manual If you had selected more than one image or an image group. Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. 2. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. when you import a geo data file. To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current Atoll document: 1.

if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to emphasise the differences in altitude. 4. 3.5 Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. To manage the properties of the DTM: 1. The context menu appears. For information on clutter height maps. 3. and type. such as the Clutter Classes. or DTM folder. It searches for the nearest match. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. 2. Figure 3.72: Problem with shortcut You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the Atoll document. For information on Display tab settings. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue.71: Missing shortcut To find the file yourself: • When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM. click folder. 3. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder. see "Clutter Heights" on page 106. it informs you with a message (see Figure 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 103 . Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. click the Browse button to locate the geo data file. 4.72). Traffic. based on size. to expand the 2. Browse to the geo data file. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. Atoll automatically searches for the missing file as well. or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. click the Find button. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. date. When it finds a possible match. 3.4 Digital Terrain Models The Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level. select it and click OK. Select Properties from the context menu. Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. Right-click on the geo data file whose link you want to repair. To repair a broken link from within the Atoll document: 1. If the geo data file is in a folder. 5. 6. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Move the Relief slider towards Flat. If the file corresponds to the source file: • Click Yes. The Properties dialogue appears.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. however this height is only an average per class. 5.71) appears. Select Properties from the context menu.

Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code. This is an optional feature that must first be activated. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. 3. The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions. The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes and their corresponding names. you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make Atoll use the values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. 8. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue: To define clutter class properties: 1. see the descriptions in the previous step. you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document: For all Atoll documents: Model Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss. To make it easier to work with clutter classes. TIF. contact support. When you import a clutter class file in BIL. Indoor penetration losses depend on the clutter types as well as the operating frequency. If desired. point analysis. When a clutter class has a descriptive name. as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. see the Technical Reference Guide. 104 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. Click the Default Values tab. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. you can assign a descriptive name to each clutter class name. Atoll can automatically assign names to clutter classes if the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. 2. In addition to the Display tab options described in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 4.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes The clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. 3. Even if there is a clutter classes map. it is the name that appears in tool tips and reports.5. 4. Enter default values for each field. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.Atoll User Manual This section explains the following: • • • • • "Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 104 "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104 "Adding a Clutter Class" on page 105 "Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 105 "Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 105. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Select Properties from the context menu. propagation models which use the height information of clutter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map. TD-SCDMA Note: - 7. To assign names to clutter classes: 1. Important: If the Height field is left blank. 2. and TD-SCDMA documents. CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. 3. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box. 5. JPEG 2000. enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column.5. For information about each field. Select Properties from the context menu.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties The parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiver location. UMTS HSPA. or IMP format. In the Name column. and Monte Carlo simulations. For more information. each clutter class display type has a visibility check box. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. you can display or hide clutter class display types individually. 3. 5. 6. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. You can define an additional indoor loss per frequency band used in the Frequency bands table in GSM GPRS EGPRS.

even if they are not used in the remaining file. enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Code 6. In the blank row marked with column. 5. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Si % of I = ------------. To add a new clutter class to the your document: 1. You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map. in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. 9. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current. This information is also available in prediction reports. Atoll removes the unused clutter classes from the list. Atoll displays the surface area covered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one. select the entire table by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C. 5. 4. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. Click Refresh. Click OK. 6.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Note: Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent. Click OK. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.5.5. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. displaying the surface area (Si in km²) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage (% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone. 3. at the bottom of the table. For example. To refresh the list of the clutter classes: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5. Select Properties from the context menu. For information on modifying the clutter class map. 3. To copy the description table. if you have imported two clutter class files and then deleted one of them. 3. 100 Sk  k © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 105 .5. if one exists. Select Properties from the context menu. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. you can refresh the list. press CTRL+V to paste the values in the table. 7. 3. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. if there is no focus or computation zone. 3. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. 2. To display the surface area covered by each clutter class: 1.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class You can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. Select Statistics from the context menu. and step 6. the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file. it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114. Tip: You can copy the description table into a new Atoll document after importing the clutter classes file.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes Under certain circumstances. Atoll displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire document. 3. On the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue in the new Atoll document. The Statistics dialogue appears.3 Adding a Clutter Class You can add a new clutter class to your document. 2. 4. Click OK.

lines. you can import or create vector objects such as contours. 3. The context menu appears. In this section. for display (in tool tips and in the status line). and points are arranged in vector layers. 2. 5. Right-click the vector layer. Atoll adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer The properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the Properties dialogue. In a clutter height file. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracy because they allow more than one height per clutter class. The Properties dialogue appears.7. but polygons can be used as filters. Atoll can use additional information related to vectors as display parameters. For information on working with data tables.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer Imported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. roads. In an Atoll document.7 Contours. vector objects such as contours. The vector table appears. the following are explained: • • • "Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 106 "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 106 "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Note: You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu. 2. The context menu appears. lines. For information on using the display tab. and for CW measurements and test mobile data paths. 106 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll uses the average clutter height per clutter class as defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104). The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in the status bar. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Select Properties from the context menu. 2.Atoll User Manual 3. Vector Layer Table All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. and Points In Atoll. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes. Atoll can read three-dimensional vector data. Select Open Table from the context menu. with. Atoll uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagation models (the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model). and points. for example. To open the vector layer table: 1. 4.6 Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM. a height is given for each point on the map. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 3. When a clutter height file is available. When you import a vector file.7. right-click the vector layer folder. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. Lines. The imported or created vectors are used primarily for display purposes. In addition. For information on Display tab settings. 3. The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. 3. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located. Select Properties from the context menu. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. the height is given as an average per clutter class. 4. or computation or focus zones. To manage the properties of clutter heights: 1. If no clutter height file exists. To manage the display of a vector layer: 1.

otherwise the file is described as embedded. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the Atoll document. a Table tab. For information on filtering. Vector Layer Properties Dialogue The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63.8. major geographical features. XMAX: The end X coordinate. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 107 . 2.1 Importing Several Scanned Images You can import scanned images into the current Atoll document one at a time. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and placing it above data such as predictions. Each line contains the following information. the coordinate system used is document’s. with the information separated by a space: • • • • File name: The name of the file. remain visible in the map window.They have no effect on calculations. antennas. You may wish. The following options are available: Name: The name of the vector layer. To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer: 1. 3.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab In Atoll. 5. The context menu appears. with its path relative to the current location of the index file. and a Display tab. road maps or satellite images. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer. In this section. Format. as specified when the file was embedded. Click the General tab. the following are explained: • • "Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 107 "Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 108. 2. Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the file’s location has changed. For information on the Table tab. Deleting. and Records menus. XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file. Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. For information on sorting. Click the Display tab. however. such as transmitters. You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geo tab from the context menu.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61. for example. or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. and predictions. see "Adding. For more information about display priority in Atoll. YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file. the coordinate system used is the file’s. calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). For more information on editing tables in Atoll. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. You can rename the vector layer using this field. Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. 3. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. For information on the Table tab. Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked. 3. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab. for example. roads. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps. Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer. The index file is a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line. Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the Atoll document. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96. The context menu appears. When the a vector layer is embedded. right-click the vector layer folder. Click the Table tab. see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. all objects on the Data tab.7. to ensure that certain geo data.8 Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window: 1. - 4. as specified when the file was imported. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41.. 3. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. etc.

The context menu appears. the following are explained: • • "Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties" on page 109 "Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics" on page 109. To define the display properties of a scanned image: 1. Select the Display tab and set the following options: Colour: Select either Automatic. Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white to be transparent.8. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range. Right-click the scanned image.9 Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. In this section. calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). or Watermark from the list.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0 File name To import an index 1. temperature. Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image. 0: The zero character ends the sequence. Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text box. allowing objects in lower layers to be visible. nice1. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation.73). Shades of gray. 108 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . they have fewer display parameters than other object types. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Select the index file and click Open. 3. 4. 3. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. 5. Figure 3.Atoll User Manual • • YMAX: The end Y coordinate.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0 nice2. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window 2.73: Scanned image Properties dialogue 3. Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast.64). Click OK. and refractivity. The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images Because imported images cannot be modified. 4. the scanned image is not displayed. Select File > Import. Click Import. XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0 3. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. vapour density. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list.

Select Statistics from the context menu. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. Click to expand the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. If the check box. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder.9. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. For information on using the display tab. 3. Note: Statistics are displayed only for visible data. Data on layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objects on the top layer. To display the statistics of the geoclimatic data: 1.2 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in the display properties (for information on defining value intervals. 4. see "Adding. Click the Table tab. Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document.9. there are as many layers as imported objects. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) of a geoclimatic map. not all objects in the folder are displayed.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table. 3. for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. if there is no focus or computation zone. is selected but shaded ( ). antennas. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.10 Setting the Priority of Geo Data Atoll lists the imported DTM.10. If the check box is selected ( ). Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the geoclimatic map appears in the map window. It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab. The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. 3. such as transmitters. 7. Value interval is the only available display type. You can select the parameter it corresponds to from the Parameters column.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data There are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data: • The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether or not the object is displayed on the map. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab of the Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. - 5. the object is not displayed. • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 109 . the object is displayed. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. Select Properties from the context menu. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Select Properties from the context menu. The following tabs are available: Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part of the geoclimatic map. Right-click any geoclimatic file in the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. and predictions. For more information. 3. 2. Deleting. Thus. clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data file and scanned image. with the relevant data selected in the Field column. For information on working with the Table tab. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column. 6. 3. Each object is placed on a separate layer. 2.1 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties To manage the properties of a geoclimatic map: 1. if the check box is cleared ( ).

and for custom geo data maps. both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules of calculation priority. are not visible. Atoll can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutter class file with the higher resolution. MAJORROADS.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations The priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display.74: Displaying Geo data layers 3. where they can be placed over data such as predictions. The clutter class layer is visible in the area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). roads. For more information. etc. etc. In other words. see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23. the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes. the DTM layer which is beneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer. remain visible in the map window For more information. RIVERLAKE. antennas. can be transferred to the Data tab. however. An object is visible only in the map window if the scale. as displayed on the zoom toolbar. the DTM. is within this range. When you make calculations in Atoll. where the density of users is higher. Population maps and custom geo data maps. so that the object is not displayed on the map. Vector geo data. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab.) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. what is used is what is seen.10. vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS. Atoll takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higher levels. and predictions. by placing the clutter class file for the downtown core over the file with the lower resolution. The only cases where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for population data in reports. DTM. 110 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . using the second file for all other calculations. The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. For more information. Therefore for each folder. MAJORSTREETS. such as transmitters. and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area. for example. In the map window. • • The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects. These are normally the objects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution. for example. major geographical features. such as predictions. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or different resolutions. such as clutter classes. Note: The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box ( ).) is the data from the top down.. Figure 3. For example. you should place the objects with the best data at the top. clutter classes. you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core.Atoll User Manual Note: All objects on the Data tab. On the other hand. Object folders. you can ensure that certain vector geo data. and some object types. and traffic density folders. clutter heights. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23. see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. the linear objects (ROADS. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. In this case. Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ). In this way. when calculating coverage in an urban area. RIVERLAKE. RAILWAYS and AIRPORT). In Figure 3. DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. clutter classes. etc. COASTLINE.74. can contain more than one data object. it will still be taken into consideration for calculations.

“DTM 2” represents a different area and has a resolution of 20 m. in both Case 1 and Case 2. the file order of the DTM files in the Explorer window does not matter because they do not overlap. Explorer window Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter DTM • DTM Case 2 DTM • DTM Clutter classes • Clutter Work space Figure 3. In Case 1. there are two imported maps: • • A clutter class map called “Clutter. In Case 2.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area In this example.3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area In this example. 3. This area is also covered by "Clutter 1" In the case of two clutter class maps.10. and the data from "Clutter 1" everywhere that is covered by "Clutter 1" but not by © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 111 . the clutter class map is on top of the DTM map.75: Multi-layer management in calculations – two DTM maps representing different areas 3. Atoll uses the order of the maps in the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window to decide which data to use. "Clutter 2" is on top of "Clutter 1". there are two imported clutter classes maps: • • "Clutter 1" represents a large area with a resolution of 50 m. "Clutter 2" represents a smaller area with a resolution of 20 m.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data The following sections give several examples to better illustrate how data are used in Atoll: • • • "Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas" on page 111 "Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area" on page 111 "Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area" on page 111. Explorer window Case 1 DTM • • Work space DTM 2 (20m) DTM 1 (50m) Case 2 DTM • • DTM 1 (50m) DTM 2 (20m) Figure 3. In Case 1.10.2.” A DTM map called “DTM”. Atoll will take all the data from both "DTM 1” and "DTM 2” into account.2. Atoll will use both the clutter and DTM data in calculations.76: Multi-layer management in calculations – Clutter and DTM maps representing the same area 3. Atoll will therefore use the data in "Clutter 2" where it is available.10. the DTM map is on top of the clutter class map. Independently of the order of the two maps in the Explorer window. In this example. In both Case 1 and Case 2.2.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas In this example. there are two imported DTM files: • • "DTM 1” represents a given area and has a resolution of 50 m. Atoll uses both the clutter and DTM data in calculations.

Note: You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well." In Case 2.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set When you export a geo data set in a user configuration file. For information on how to display information in tooltips. once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters. ) on the toolbar has been 3. height. "Clutter 1" is on top and completely covers "Clutter 2. see the Administrator Manual. Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is saved into an external file. When you export the geographic data set. indoor loss. standard deviations.12. transparency. etc. For information.12 Geographic Data Sets In Atoll." Therefore. you can save much of this information in a user configuration file. Then.11 Displaying Information About Geo Data You can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips. and indoor loss) raster or user profile traffic map description. tips text. percentage pilot finger of each clutter class. Atoll will only use the data from "Clutter 1. another user. orthogonality factor. name. default standard deviations. can import the configuration file containing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters.) clutter description (code." Explorer window Work space Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (20m) • Clutter 1 (50m) Case 2 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (50m) • Clutter 1 (20m) Figure 3. In this section. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 112 "Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 113.Atoll User Manual "Clutter 2. To display information about the geo data in a tool tip: • Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24.77: Multi-layer management in calculations – two clutter maps representing the same area 3. you export: • • • • the paths of imported geographic maps map display settings (visibility scale. The surface area is only given for closed polygons. Note: Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( selected. working on a similar Atoll document.

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 113 . "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Traffic data maps Custom data maps (for more information. Click OK. select the Delete existing geo data check box.13 Editing Geographic Data In Atoll. 3. adding a vector layer to the Population folder and then adding polygons. lines. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. 4. If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data. select it and click Open. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. If you already have geographic data in your current Atoll document and would like to replace it with any imported data. To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set: 1.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data To export a geo data set in a user configuration file: 1. select the check boxes of the items you want to import. DXF. Atoll checks if there are already geographic data in the current Atoll document.2 Importing a Geo Data Set When you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set. Click OK. and points (for more information.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configuration file. In the Save As dialogue. You can also edit the Windows shortcut to Atoll and add "-cfg <. The Open dialogue appears. browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3. In the User Configuration dialogue. for example. 6. SHP. Note: You can automatically start Atoll with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll.12. Click OK. The following types of geographic data can be edited: • • • • • • Clutter classes (for more information. or TAB format) (for more information. "Editing Clutter Class Maps" on page 114) Contours.. Lines. 4. 2. AGD. i. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is imported into your current Atoll document. Browse to the user configuration file. "Editing Polygons. 5. 5. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Geoclimatic maps (for more information. If so. In the User Configuration dialogue.78: The User Configuration dialogue 3. The User Configuration dialogue appears. clear the Delete existing geo data check box. select the Geographic Data Set check box. and Points" on page 34) Population maps (if they are in vector format. you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by. 3. Figure 3.cfg" and placing it in the same folder as the Atoll executable. The Save As dialogue appears. the option Delete existing geo data appears with other options in the User Configuration dialogue. MIF. When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set.78).e. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115). Erdas Imagine (16-bit). 3. 2.

Select Edit from the context menu.13. a polygon drawing tool . "Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 115 3. To edit clutter polygons: 1. Select Edit from the context menu. The context menu appears. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. 8. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. 7.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps Clutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon.Atoll User Manual 3. The pointer changes to a pencil ( ). The point is deleted.79). Deleting a point: i. the following are explained: • • • • "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114 "Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 114 "Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 115. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Adding a point: i. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 2. From the list. 2. You can now edit the clutter polygon by: Moving a point: i. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. A point is added to the border at the position of the pointer. 5. The pointer changes ( ). you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons. 114 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Figure 3. a polygon deletion tool .2 Editing Clutter Polygons You can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create.1.79). 3. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list. ii. and a Close button (see Figure 3. Note: You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. Click the polygon drawing button ( ). Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The pointer changes ( ). Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.13. 3. You can later edit and export the polygons you have created. Double-click to close the polygon. You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons.13.1. ii. ii. 6. The context menu appears. In this section. The pointer changes ( ). 3. To create a polygon: 1. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point. 4. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken into account by propagation model calculations.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon In Atoll. Drag the point to its new position. Note: Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue. Select the polygon.79: Editor toolbar 4.

1. you can ensure that you select the correct folder. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu. for example. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selected geo data object folder. The Properties dialogue appears with the coordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area. 2. 3. 10. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.13. 2. Select Edit from the context menu. geoclimatic maps. b. 5. Right-click the the Geoclimatic Parameters. and points) to this layer. To draw a rectangle.2 Editing Geoclimatic Maps Some geographic data maps.79). The polygon is deleted. 2. click the New Rectangle button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: a.13. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 115 .79). The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. you must map the vector layer. ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: 6. 7. Double-click to close the contour. Note: You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the polygon. 3. The context menu appears. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.1. the Geoclimatic Parameters. The pointer changes ( ). Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. To create a vector layer and vector objects on a geo data map: 1. 9.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons To display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 3. The context menu appears. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. are made up of individual vector objects. 4. Select Edit from the context menu. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Right-click the new polygon or rectangle and select Properties from the context menu. to which you want to add a vector layer. By renaming each vectors folder. To delete a clutter polygon: 1. 4. Click the polygon you want to delete. Enter a value: Geoclimatic Parameters: Enter a value in the Rain Intensity field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for the polygon. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons You can delete clutter polygons. b. folder. 3. 5. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. click the New Polygon button ( a. Right-click the new vector layer. 3. Click the polygon deletion tool ( ). it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. lines. For information on renaming objects. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon ( 11. 8. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.13. Select Edit from the context menu. 4. To draw a polygon.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. The context menu appears. For Atoll to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map. The context menu appears. c. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects (contours. Right-click the geo data object. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. folder. ) or the New Rectangle ( ) button on the Vector Edition toolbar. c.

and Points" on page 34. Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab. Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save the selected part as a new file. The Save As dialogue appears. see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96). Select Save As from the context menu. BIL: When you select the BIL format. TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export. In the Save As dialogue. "Rain" is selected by default. enter a name for the file.14. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. 3. TIF: When you select tagged image file format. no corresponding geo-reference file is created.1. or in a different raster format. or just your modifications to the geo data. This section explains the following: • • "Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 116 "Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the georeference information. you can save your modifications to an external file. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. 5.80). The Properties dialogue appears. 3. you can export them to a new external file. 13. 3. You can edit the vector objects as explained in "Editing Polygons. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Select Properties from the context menu. exporting either the entire geo data or just your modifications allows you to save those modifications to an external file. When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. For the following geo data: Geoclimatic Parameters: In the Field column. GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing the georeference information. 4. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Export an embedded file to be used in another Atoll document or in another application: You can save a file to an external file. Lines. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding TFW file containing the georeference information.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File You can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file. Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data type in Atoll. To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file: 1. 2. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. This section explains the following: • • • • • "Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 116 "Updating the Source File" on page 117 "Combining Several Files into One File" on page 118 "Exporting an Embedded File" on page 118 "Creating a New File from a Larger File" on page 119 3. When exporting in BIL format. JPEG 2000: When you select the JPEG 2000 format. Click Save. Click the Data Mapping tab.Atoll User Manual 12. either in the same format as used in the current Atoll document. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. you can save these changes to the source file. Saving a geographic file separately from saving the Atoll document enables you to: • • • • • Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data.1 Saving Modifications to an External File In Atoll.14 Saving Geographic Data Atoll allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the Atoll document. 116 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data. and select the file format from the Save as type list. the part containing the computation zone. you can save them as one file. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats (for more information. You can select from one of the following file formats: BMP: When you select bitmap format. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.14. in the same format or in another one.

or traffic objects.80: Export dialogue 6. the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps. Atoll prompts you to save the changes when you close the document. - - 7. and select the file format from the Save as type list. Define a Resolution in Metres. whether or not the computation zone is visible. 5.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. You can embed the file afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). You can select from one of the following file formats: AGD: The Atoll Geographic Data format is an Atoll-specific format. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. Atoll saves the changes automatically when you save the document. Click OK. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points. The context menu appears. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. Atoll can read AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats. the MIF or the TAB format. If several objects have been modified. 3. If the Atoll document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM. Select Save As from the context menu. and points. In the Save As dialogue. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classes geo data folder. no other clutter class geo data file. To export a vector layer: 1. MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats. If the geo data file is linked. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in the current Atoll document. the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified objects. the suggested resolution is 100 m. the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object. 2.14. you may make changes to geo data. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported file replaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. it cannot save vectors made of lines or points. the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the clutter classes. Click Export. Click Save in the Save As dialogue. The Save As dialogue appears. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file. The selected data is saved in an external file. - 4.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File You can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. As a format created for Atoll. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. 3. 3. SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons. Under Region. Along with vector layers you have added to the Geo tab. right-click the vector layer folder. lines. use either the AGD.2 Updating the Source File While working on an Atoll document.1. displaying the current coordinate system and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change. Once you save a vector layer. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 117 . The suggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria: If one object has been modified. If the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer.14. enter a name for the file. 8. If there is no initial clutter class object. The Vector Export dialogue appears. the following maps can be exported as vector format files: • • • Vector-format population maps Vector-format geoclimatic maps Vector-format custom maps. A vector layer can contain contours.

The context menu appears. You can combine these separate files to create one single file. the combined file will show the file on the top. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file. The suggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects. 3.14. Click OK. Select Save from the context menu. 118 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . for example. Under Region. 3. To export an embedded geo data file: 1. 6. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. ensure that you want to replace the current file before proceeding to the following step. The files will be combined according to their order from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The Save As dialogue appears.4 Exporting an Embedded File You can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different Atoll document. 3. The context menu appears. Atoll replaces the embedded file in the current Atoll document with the newly exported file. If the geo data file is a vector file. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. The Save As dialogue appears. or in a different application. Define a Resolution in Metres. 2. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. 5. Caution: You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file.81).81).14. select The Entire Project Area. Select Save As from the context menu. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Click OK. you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117).3 Combining Several Files into One File In certain circumstances. Select Save As from the context menu. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.Atoll User Manual To update the source file of a linked geo data file: 1. The linked file is updated. 5. 8. Therefore. You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps To combine individual files into a new file: 1. 3. Click OK. 3. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. 2. the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. If the files overlap on the map. 7. The context menu appears. Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. The selected data is saved as a new file. 4. If you do not want to replace the current file. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. you may have several geo data files of the same type. When you export an embedded file. after importing an MSI Planet® index file. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geo data files. 4.

Select Save As from the context menu. The exported file will replace the embedded file in the Geo data tab. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. 3. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. If the geo data file is a raster file. Under Region. 2. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. 5. see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82.81: The Vector Export dialogue a. To create a new file. The selected data is saved in an external file. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The context menu appears. The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system.82). Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the geo data. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. you must first define the area by creating a computation zone. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.14. Click OK. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 119 . 3. Click OK. or in a new Atoll document. - b. the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. whether or not the computation zone is visible. To change the coordinate system used for the exported file. You can use this new file in the same Atoll document. c. Define a Resolution in Metres.82: Export dialogue a. The Save As dialogue appears. Click Export. You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Population Geoclimatic maps To create a new file from a section of a larger file: 1. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. 4. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file. click Change.5 Creating a New File from a Larger File You can create a new file from a section of a larger file. Figure 3.81). b. For information on the Coordinate Systems dialogue. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder.

8. The selected data is saved as a new file. Define a Resolution in Metres. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. whether or not the computation zone is visible. 7. select The Computation Zone.Atoll User Manual 6. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. Under Region. 120 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click OK. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.

Chapter 4 Antennas and Equipment .

.

2. Right-click the Links folder. This chapter explains working with antennas as well as equipment such as waveguides and cables: • • • • • "Defining the List of Manufacturers" on page 123 "Defining Antennas" on page 123 "Microwave Equipment" on page 127 "Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 138.. Select Antennas > New from the context menu. 4. 2.1 Defining the List of Manufacturers In Atoll. the equipment used to create a network is modelled. The operating frequency band and manufacturer-related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatible antenna/equipment sets.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4 Antennas and Equipment In Atoll. 3. To create an entry in the Manufacturers table. The Manufacturers table appears. 4. Atoll uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams when determining propagation. and antennas are listed in the Manufacturers table. you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor. and diameter). gain. horizontal pattern. Atoll models microwave antennas and provides default microwave antennas. Each of these patterns can have both co-polar and cross-polar patterns defined. horizontal and vertical plane diagrams for horizontal and vertical polarization.e. Comments: Any comments. The MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue appears. The context menu appears. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. Select Manufacturers > Open table from the context menu. i.e. each microwave antenna is identified by a name. 3. Tip: To create an antenna: When you create a new antenna. 6. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 4. In this section the following are described: • • • • "Creating an Antenna" on page 123 "Importing Microwave Antennas" on page 125 "Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 125 "Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 126. Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas. 5. 1.2 Defining Antennas In Atoll. 4. Right-click the Links folder. Because an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized. You can enter information in the following fields: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 123 . manufacturer. Click the General tab. 2. and antenna diameter. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.1 Creating an Antenna The microwave antenna is used to radiate or receive electromagnetic energy in the form of high-frequency radio waves. along with the characteristics which have a bearing on network performance. vertical pattern. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. waveguides. To create or modify an entry in the Manufacturers table: 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. horizontal and vertical antenna patterns. The context menu appears. Atoll enables you to create new antennas and set the parameters of each (i. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ): Name: The name of the manufacturer. the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment. 5. and defined by the operating frequency band.. To modify an entry in the Manufacturers table. 4. As well. manufacturer name. name. gain.

124 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Under Cross Polar Discrimination (XPD). When you paste the data into the MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern. Atoll interpolates the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern around the antenna. Frequency Band: The frequency band that this antenna will be used with. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Figure 4.Horizontal plane: - - Vertical polarisation . b. Define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna. Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern.Atoll User Manual Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna. Atoll removes blank rows in the pattern table when you press the Apply button. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane.Vertical: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. A microwave antenna is defined by 8 radiation patterns. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from existing pattern values. Click Apply to display the pattern. When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available. for the vertical polarisation.Vertical plane: - a. If some values are missing in the data sheet. On each of the four tabs of the antenna properties dialogue. When you calculate along an angle for which no data is available. . g.Vertical plane: - - Vertical polarisation . Copy the selected data. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Horizontal: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section.Horizontal plane: Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Comments: Any additional information on the antenna. Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern. Switch to Atoll. Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer. 7. If there are some blank rows in the data sheet. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. for the horizontal polarisation. Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain. e. displays the cross polar discriminations for horizontal and vertical polarisations. Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern. Horizontal polarisation . c. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from the existing pattern values.83: Copying horizontal pattern values d. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. you can define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna: Horizontal polarisation . Paste the data in the table. Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. - - 6. You can modify the name Atoll enters if you wish. Diameter: The diameter of the antenna. f. Click OK.

1. 3. To edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna: 1. Right-click the Links folder. 8. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. 6. Right-click the Links folder. Select Record Properties from the context menu. 4.fcc.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp. 4.003 and WG16. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern window and choosing the either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu. see "Creating an Antenna" on page 123). Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Atoll automatically calculates the antenna diameter from the antenna gain and average operating frequency. 7. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open.11 – Log  Max Frequency – Min Frequency  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------  2 20 Diametre  m  = 10 For more information on antenna file formats. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 125 . To import antenna files: 1. Editing a Single Radiation Pattern You can edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna. you can modify antenna patterns by editing them individually or you can copy the antenna patterns of one antenna and replace the antenna patterns of another antenna: • • "Editing a Single Radiation Pattern" on page 125 "Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas" on page 126. Click the Browse button ( 7.0501. Edit the antenna pattern by entering new values in the table. The Data Import dialogue appears. The context menu appears. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.3 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns In Atoll. The context menu appears. which gives:  Gain  dBi  + 2. In the Data Import dialogue.99. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 5. 2. The MW Antennas table appears. 6. 4. The antenna diameter is calculated using the following equation for a radiation efficiency of 55 %: Gain  dBi  = 20  Log  Diametre  m   + 20   Frequency  MHz   – 42. Select Antennas > Import from the context menu.050). choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.2. The context menu appears. 3. see the following web site: http://www.html. The average operating frequency is calculated as (Maximum Frequency .Minimum Frequency)/2.2 Importing Microwave Antennas Atoll enables you to import antenna files in the Planet microwave antenna format or in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16. The antenna’s Properties dialogue appears. Atoll does not stop the import process if an error occurs. 5.2. Note: You can display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes.99. The file or folders are imported.89.2 . 8. Click Import. Select the tab of the pattern you want to edit (for information on the tabs of the antenna’s Properties dialogue. 2. Right-click the antenna in the Antennas table whose horizontal or vertical pattern you want to edit. For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16. see the Technical Reference Guide. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. Atoll continues until all files are imported and then displays how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported in the Events viewer.

Atoll replaces the old pattern with the new one in the MW Antennas table. Select Edit > Paste to paste the antenna pattern. Figure 4. Right-click the Links folder. 2. 6. Select Edit > Copy to copy the cell. 6. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern of an antenna and choosing either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.vertical plane V Polar. .horizontal plane H Polar. The MW Antennas table appears. select the cell with the pattern. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. 126 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. In the row of the antenna with the pattern you want to copy. 4. The Properties dialogue appears. • Patterns are displayed in the MW Antennas table with either linear or logarithmic axes as defined in the Properties dialogue of an individual antenna. The context menu appears. By resizing row height and column width. 7. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.H Plane: Horizontal polarization .84). Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. 5.84: MW Antennas table 5. Notes: • You can also copy an antenna pattern by right-clicking the pattern on the tab of the antenna’s Properties dialogue and selecting Copy from the context menu. To open the MW Antennas table: 1.horizontal plane V Polar.V Plane: Horizontal polarization . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. you can view all antenna patterns in order to be able to compare them (see Figure 4.2. . 8. In the row of the antenna you want to copy the pattern to. . Select the tab with the antenna pattern you want to print: H Polar. 7.vertical plane 8.V Plane: Vertical polarization . 3.Atoll User Manual Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas Atoll enables you to copy antenna patterns in the MW Antennas table. Select Record Properties from the context menu. 4. The context menu appears. 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. By copying and pasting patterns in the MW Antennas table you can assign the antenna patterns of one antenna to another. . 3. The MW Antennas table appears.H Plane: Vertical polarization .4 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns To print the pattern of a microwave antenna: 1. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu. select the cell with the pattern.

Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 9. the higher the gain of the antenna. Antenna The antenna is the part of the microwave link that transmits electromagnetic energy from transmission lines into the air and receives transmitted electromagnetic energy from the air to be then sent on transmission lines. flat or planar. parabolic. horn. The antenna can be in one of many different shapes (for example. Front-to-Back Ratio (FBR): The FBR is the ratio of the power radiated in the desired direction to the power radiated in the opposite direction. • • Gain: The gain is the amount of power radiated in a given direction using only the RF power at the input terminals of the antenna. The portion of the pattern where the maximum gain occurs is often referred to as the main lobe of the pattern Polarisation: Polarisation is the ability to transmit only one of the two electromagnetic vector components of the wave (either the horizontal component or the vertical component). directivity is defined as: • • The ability to send the transmitted power in only the desired direction The ability to reject undesired signals coming from other directions. yagi. In general. It consists of the following components: • • The radio modem that converts the digital signal into a form suitable for modulation on the radio carrier signal The power supply for the Outdoor Unit (ODU) Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU converts the modulated signal from its low frequency form to a high frequency radio signal in the appropriate radio band and channel for radio transmission.3 Microwave Equipment Microwave radio equipment are the elements used to convert the initial data to microwave frequency signals that can then be transmitted over a given microwave link and to the elements used to convert microwave frequency signals received to data.85: Radio system components Indoor Unit (IDU) The IDU is the termination point of the end-user equipment that generates the data to be carried by the microwave link. or array) to achieve its specific objectives. is composed of three main sub-systems: • • • Indoor unit (IDU) Outdoor unit (ODU) Antenna Figure 4. the higher the FBR. The microwave radio system. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 127 . Radiation pattern: The radiation pattern is a diagram showing the direction of the radiated power. 4. The main characteristics of the microwave antenna are the following: • Directivity: In practical terms. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu. lens. Using polarisation enables the same radio frequency to be used by different radio systems in physical proximity to one another. as well as the equipment that constitute it. typically between 35 and 50 dB.

Enter the power range reserved for Adaptive Transmission Power Control (Max ATPC) and the maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF). For cold standby systems. the standby channel frequency must be the same as one of the active channels. 4. Enter the Frequency Band that this equipment will use. The Max ATPC can be optionally taken into consideration during calculations.. the 128 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Switching to the standby channel in case of failure can be automatic and is then referred to a "hot" standby system. The context menu appears. 3. and then define its parameters using its Properties dialogue. 128 QAM modulation is modelled as shown below: 4 PSK (QPSK) modulation is modelled as shown below: - Enter the maximum power (Max Power) and the Noise Figure. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. set the following parameters: Enter the Model or descriptive name of the equipment. If a hot standby system is available. Enter the Number of States and select the modulation from the Modulation list. XPIF is generally within the range of 15-20 dB. To create a piece of microwave equipment: 1. the following are explained: • • • "Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll" on page 128 "Importing Microwave Equipment" on page 132 "Advanced Configuration" on page 132.Atoll User Manual Vertical polarisation Horizontal polarisation Figure 4. 5. The MW Equipment New Element Properties dialogue appears. 4. For more information on antennas. The maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF) is used only when an XPIC (cross-polarized interference canceller) is present.e. 2. see "Defining Antennas" on page 123. In this section. The defining parameters of each piece of microwave equipment are stored in the MW Equipment table. you must select the Hot Standby Available check box. power control. It is used to reduce the scattering of interference from the undesired polarisation into the desired polarisation due to rain fading by increasing the cross-polarisation discrimination factor (XPD). the equipment protection configuration). modulation and demodulation of signals to be transmitted and signals received at the antenna. If the system must be manually switched to the standby channel. Standby channels are inactive and used only when active channels fail. The system configuration is defined in the form of "n + m" where "n" is the number of active channels and "m" is the number of standby channels. to describe the system configuration in terms of channels and to define supported bit rates using trunk types with defined digital hierarchy. On the General tab of Properties dialogue. XPD is a design parameter that is maximized in the main lobe of the antenna pattern. - Specify the System Configuration (i.86: Polarisation • Cross Polarisation Discrimination (XPD): The XPD is the ratio of power received in the desired polarisation to the power received in undesired polarisation. Max ATPC also enables the transmitter to respond to increased interference levels resulting from ATPC on other links. the system is called a "cold" standby system. You can create a new piece of microwave equipment using the MW Equipment table. Select Equipment > New from the context menu. the IDU and ODU are combined and modelled as microwave equipment.1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll In Atoll. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. The Max ATPC is used by the transmitter to adjust power by increasing or reducing it in order to maintain signal quality in case of multipath or rain fading that temporarily attenuates the received signal. Microwave transceiver equipment is used to manage output power.3. Right-click the Links folder. For a hot standby system.

set the following parameters: Under Digital Hierarchy. but only the main equipment is active. - Under Rate. W. May-June 1979.5 7 1 Kn values (without adaptive equalization) Rummler Model: If you want to use the Rummler model to predict outage times. Under Radio Signature. "Digital radio outage due to selective fading. pp. the number of trunks) and the trunk type from the list. choose the method to be used to predict outage times (dispersive fade margin) due to multipath fading. both the main and standby equipment are on..530 recommendation.W. see studies by C. 2. Note: The radio signature parameters are not used by all types of receiver equipment. This method will characterise the ability of a receiving equipment to perform successfully (i. and define the frequency shift (Width) and Depth for both minimum and non-minimum phases.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment standby channel frequency can be different from active channels. 6.e. Rummler2 and the ITU P. prediction from laboratory simulations. On the Hierarchy and Rate tab of Properties dialogue. 1988. Frequencies allocated to active and standby channels are defined in the microwave link properties dialogue.4 5. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 129 ." IEEE Globecom Proceedings.e.. This information is available from the manufacturer. Rummler. The Kn parameter is mostly dependant on the modulation used. only the main equipment is active and on. select Rummler model. which will serve as a back-up in case the main equipment fails. 1 + 1 redundancy mode with monitored hot standby (Hot Standby Available) is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. "Characterizing the effects of multipath dispersion on digital radios. The other equipment.W. pp.D. produce acceptable errors rates) in the presence of frequency-selective fading. 1 + 1 redundancy mode is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. 1727-1732. The standby equipment will be automatically put into service immediately if the main equipment fails. select Normalised and enter a value for the Kn Parameter. Modulation 64-QAM 16-QAM 8-PSK 4-PSK Kn 15. is not turned on. Rummler. C." Bell System Technical Journal. 1073-1100. Figure 4. For more information.D.observation vs. select the digital hierarchy type (SDH/SONET or PDH).87: Defining the method to be used to predict outage times Normalised: For a normalised signature. Lundgren and W. select the Capacity (i.D. Lundgren and W.

and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. On the Outages tab of Properties dialogue. select User-defined C/I min. as well as the quality required for a BER of 10-3 and 10-6 in the For a BER of 1e-3 and the For a BER of 1e-3 text boxes. - - - User-defined C/I min. you can define how the MXPD is calculated: Calculated C/I min. 7. Under Signal Enhancements Margin Calculation (E).. Atoll will calculates the required quality based on the user-defined interference margin.. The MTBF is used to define the reliability of the equipment and corresponds to the average length of time that the equipment functions without failing. select Calculated C/I min.Atoll User Manual The rate is calculated by the capacity per trunk multiplied by the number of trunks: The minimal and standardised channel bandwidth resulting from the parameters defined on the Hierarchy and Rate tab is displayed under Channel Bandwidth. and define the losses on Transmission and Reception. define the Overflow Threshold. On the Losses tab of Properties dialogue. On the Sensitivity tab of Properties dialogue.: If you want to use a calculated minimum C⁄I. The MTBF is available from the equipment manufacturer. This will be used to calculate the thermal fade margin. set the following parameters: Enter the losses due to the use of filters on transmission (Transmission Filter) and reception (Reception Filter): - For each circulator present on this piece of equipment. define the (BER-Sensitivity) pairs. The overflow threshold is the maximum receiver sensitivity before saturation. set the following parameters: Under Calculation of the Thermal Fade Margin (TFM). Under Cross-polar Discrimination Reduction Calculation (MXPD).: If you want to define a minimum C⁄I. 8. You can enter the channel bandwidth defined by the manufacturer in the From manufacturer text box. The Hot Standby - 130 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . set the Port it is attached to. Enter the Hot Standby Commutation Delay. 9. and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is the maximum amount of time it would take to switch to backup equipment if the main equipment fails. set the following parameters: Enter the Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF). It is used to calculate the margin against enhancements. Enter the receiver signal level (threshold) at which the radio runs continuous errors at a specified rate (BER).

Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. This is done instead of calculating C/I values and comparing them to the published objectives. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. The context menu appears. It is provided by the manufacturer. To edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment: 1. The microwave transceiver equipment’s Properties dialogue appears. you must indicate which channel will be used as a backup in case of main equipment failure. when you define the properties for a link. The T/I graph defines the graph of maximum interfering power levels for different frequency separations between the transmitter and victim receivers. define a receiver mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. 3. 10. 11. On the T⁄I Graph tab of Properties dialogue. The threshold-to-interference (T/I) ratio is used to calculate the interference fade margin (IFM) which defines the vulnerability to co-channel and adjacent channel interference. 5. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. Right-click the Links folder.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. For more information on defining link properties. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. the received power level in dB is compared to the maximum power level to determine whether the interference is acceptable. Right-click the record whose properties you want to edit. 2. Click OK to create the new piece of equipment. 6. define a threshold-to-interference (T⁄I) graph either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. The context menu appears. 7. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. The resulting T⁄I graph is displayed in the graph window on the right. 4. On the Transmitter Mask tab of Properties dialogue. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 131 . For each interfering transmitter. The Equipment table appears. On the Receiver Mask tab of Properties dialogue. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. Edit the properties as previously explained in this section. define the transmitter spectral mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. to let Atoll create the graph from standard values. The resulting transmitter mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. Furthermore. The resulting receiver mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. You can edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment through the properties dialogues. 12. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. Select Record Properties from the context menu. 13. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment Commutation Delay is used only if Hot Standby Available is selected on the General tab of this Properties dialogue.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F).

you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the Trunk Type table. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. Notes: Atoll does not stop the import process when an error occurs. In the Data Import dialogue. In Atoll. The synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) refers to the group or layers of transmission rates or standards that can transport digital data of different capacities through high bandwidth mediums such as optical fibres or radio waves. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. in other words. A microwave link inherits the capacity of the trunk type through its assigned equipment. It continues until all the files have been imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported. 4. Click the Browse button ( 7. For more information on the theoretical graphs. The file or folders are imported. the rising and falling edges of the pulses in each data streams do not coincide. 2. but the basic principles of multiplexing are the same. The context menu appears. NSMA-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension NSM. The European (SDH) and American (SONET) versions of SDH systems differ slightly. see the Technical Reference Guide. Pathloss-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension RAF. The Data Import dialogue appears. Due to the synchronous nature of the SDH. digital hierarchies are modelled as trunk types. For further information about the NSMA and Pathloss file formats. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. Note: If you are creating a large number of different trunk types from manufacturers data.3 Advanced Configuration Atoll offers several advanced configuration options: • • • "Digital Hierarchies" on page 132 "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 133 "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. 4. The following section describes creating and modifying trunk types to model digital hierarchies.051 or in Pathloss format (version 4. 3.3.1 Digital Hierarchies Atoll models PDH as well as SDH digital hierarchies. In this case. Select Equipment > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Each defined trunk type defines a supported bit rate and is a parameter of microwave equipment. the average frequency of all slave clocks in the system is the same. PDH networks have data streams with the same nominal frequency but are not synchronised with each other. it can take a long time. The frame formats and thus the data rates of both systems are not the same but are compatible due to their synchronous nature. the T/I graph defined for identical modulations is imported into the T/I Graph tab while the others are imported into the theoretical graphs table. 5.Atoll User Manual 4. 8. a microwave link that has a capacity of 2 with an assigned trunk type of E1 will be capable of transferring data at twice the E1 standard bit rate. if you have the data available in tabular format. Creating a Microwave Trunk Type Atoll has a set of default trunk type definitions available. The plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio. 132 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .3.99.3. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136.2 Importing Microwave Equipment Atoll enables you to import equipment files that are in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) format defined by the recommendation WG 21. Right-click the Links folder. Click Import. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.3. However. but you can create new trunk types and set their parameters. To import equipment files: 1. For example. The European and American versions of PDH systems differ slightly in their data rates. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open.0). 6. Each equipment file can contain several T/I graphs for different pairs of modulations.

. No. Figure 4. Binary Rate Supported (Mbit/s): The binary rate supported is the payload rate (i.530-8 recommendation.88)..2 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. Bits/Block: The number of bits per block corresponds to the number of bits per frame (i.88: Trunk Types table 5. For each trunk type you define. The trunk type’s Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Binary Rate (Mbit/s): The binary rate is the gross data rate of the frame if all the bits are used for traffic. You can also define the properties of a trunk type in its Properties dialogue. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal.e.3.3. the digital hierarchy being modelled is SDH or SONET. If the check box is not selected ( ). add the following data: Trunk Type: The name of the trunk type that will model the digital hierarchy. Select Equipment > Digital Hierarchies from the context menu. Table 2) of the ITU-R P.89: Trunk type Properties dialogue 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 133 . The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3.e. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Figure 4. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. SDH/SONET: If the check box is selected ( ). the rate of the useful bits not including the overheads bits).Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment To create a microwave trunk type: 1. BERses: BERses corresponds to Bit Error Rate (BER) as documented in Annex 2. The context menu appears. the digital hierarchy being modelled is PDH. 4. Right-click on the Links folder.89). To open a trunk type’s Properties dialogue: • Double-click the trunk type in the left margin of the Trunk Types table. the useful bits plus the overheads bits).

To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. Figure 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. or the theoretical graphs if not. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). Otherwise. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. 2. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. The context menu appears. capacity. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. 4. If the equipment manufacturer.Atoll User Manual The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 134 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 135. If so. or modulation are not the same. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list.90).91). Right-click on the Links folder. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph.91: IRF record Properties dialogue 134 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 6.90: IRF table 5. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. Atoll uses it. Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. If so. capacity and modulation. Figure 4. In this section. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 4. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1.

Select the Frequency Band from the menu. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. Figure 4. 6. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. 2. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 135 . 9.92: IRF Setting dialogue 5. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. delete an IRF graph. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. 8. Click OK. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. 4. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue. You can now define an IRF graph. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment.90). Right-click on the Links folder. 7.

It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate as a function of the level of interference. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. 136 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Right-click the theoretical graph you want to modify.3 Creating Theoretical Graphs A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions of C/I. 3. b. frequency band. b. when information about the transmitter mask. c. rate.uk and transmitter and receiver masks have been found at http:\\www. the receiver mask. d. Select Equipment > Theoretical Graphs from the context menu. Click OK. Select Add Record from the context menu. or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer.3. d. They can be used to initialise equipment properties (the transmitter mask. or T/I graph is missing). 3. Click OK. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. Select Delete from the context menu.gov. The theoretical graph’s Properties dialogue appears. These theoretical graphs can describe either the transmitter mask. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. c. 4. b. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries.ero.Atoll User Manual To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. A dialogue appears. Frequency Band: The frequency band for which the graph is valid. 4. f. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. 2. 9. It can be either a transmitter mask. 6.radio. Under Reception Filter. The context menu appears. or a receiver mask. Modulation: The modulation for which the graph is valid. The context menu appears.3 Theoretical Graphs Atoll allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (i. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). and modulation. The Theoretical Graphs table appears. Type of Graph: The type of theoretical graph you define.e. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. or the receiver mask. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. The context menu appears. bandwidth. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click the General tab and define the following parameters: Name: The name of the theoretical graph. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Under Enter graph values.3. T/I graphs have been found at the web address http://www. or a T/I graph. Rate: The rate for which the graph is valid. 5. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. The context menu appears. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. Under Transmitter Filter. Channel Width: The bandwidth for which the graph is valid. Right-click the Links folder. the T/I graph) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. the receiver mask..dk. To create a theoretical graph: 1. e. Manufacturer: The manufacturer for which the graph is valid. Default theoretical graphs are available for different frequency bands and bandwidths. 7. The context menu appears. g. Select Record Properties from the context menu. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. Note: You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.

Cable loss is measured in terms of decibels per 100m. 4. microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss a signal undergoes per 100m of their length. However. The dielectric material is usually air or foam. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). called the cut-off frequency. To create a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. If the graph describes the receiver mask. with very low attenuation. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. 2. the thicker the cable. define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the MWGuides table. see "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. called a waveguide. if you have the data available in tabular format. The following sections describe the modelling of waveguides and cables in Atoll: • • "Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. Once a microwave waveguide or cable has been defined. The MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. If the graph is a T/I graph. the dielectric losses are also negligible. The electric and magnetic fields are contained within the guide. and therefore there is no radiation loss. Select Waveguides and Cables > New from the context menu. Figure 4. The context menu appears.4 Microwave Waveguides and Cables Waveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipment to the microwave antenna.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8.4. define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube. the lower the loss. it can take a long time. Right-click the Links folder. The waveguide is designed for a specific wavelength.1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables In Atoll. These are quite robust and therefore easy to install. The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. If the graph describes the transmitter mask. define the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.93: MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue 5. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area. 9. Since the dielectric is air. the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. For information on the MWGuides table. Hence.93). Cables. you can assign it to a microwave link for both transmission and reception. 4. on the other hand. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. ) opens the Prop- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 137 . 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. For the new waveguide or cable. have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor. Note: If you are creating a large number of waveguides and cables based on manufacturers data. 4. Click OK. Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph.

The defined compatible antenna/ equipment/waveguide sets can be then selected when you define the properties of a microwave link. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. and waveguides. 6. 4. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. or Rectangular.5.e. 4. In this section. equipment. Right-click the record in the Waveguides and Cables table that you want to modify. To modify a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list.1. you can access and modify any defined microwave waveguide or cable using the MWGuides table. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.4. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. Select Waveguides and Cables > Open Table from the context menu. The record’s Properties dialogue appears. 7. Other. When you define the properties (i. equipment. 8. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 6. Elliptic.Atoll User Manual Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. In this section. Other. Circular. Right-click the Links folder.. 3. and waveguides as options in lists. the following are explained: • • "Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table" on page 138 "Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table" on page 139 4. The context menu appears. Click OK. The Waveguides and Cables table appears. You can select from Cable. Click OK. For the waveguide or cable. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. ) opens the Prop- Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. and waveguides) of a microwave link. 3. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. antennas. You can define compatibility directly in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables or you can use the assistants available in Atoll to define compatibility. you can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables to define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. these compatibility definitions can be used to display only compatible antennas. Select Record Properties from the context menu.1 Defining Compatibility Manually In Atoll.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll allows you to define compatibility between antennas. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m.5. 4. 138 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Elliptic.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and waveguides. 5. 2. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. you can modify the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable. or Rectangular.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable In Atoll. equipment. the following are explained: • • "Defining Compatibility Manually" on page 138 "Using Assistants to Define Compatibility" on page 139. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. You can select from Cable. Circular. 4. Right-click the Links folder. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer.

you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. 3. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter.5..e. 4. if desired. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. The Antenna/Guides Compatibility table appears. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter. these are taken into account and. 5. if desired. When you define the properties (i. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. 5. antennas. a piece of equipment compatible with an antenna will be compatible with the waveguides compatible with this antenna. The context menu appears.2. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. 4. Right-click the Links folder. equipment. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and waveguides that operate in the same frequency band. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7. The Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table appears. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. respectively.5. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. these compatibility definitions can be used in order to display only compatible antennas. Select the Frequency Band from the list. Create a new antenna/waveguide compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and a Guide from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). 4. and waveguides as options in lists. A dialogue appears. Only waveguides manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table.1.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. the following are explained: • • "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 139 "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 140.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Edit Grid from the context menu. equipment. You can also. You can also. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Open Table from the context menu. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. enter a Comment by double-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The values in the Antenna and Guide lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MWGuides table. Create a new antenna/equipment compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and Equipment from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). In this section. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. 4. 4. and waveguides) of a microwave link. The values in the Antenna and Equipment lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MW Equipment table. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. by default. 5. Right-click on the Links folder.5. 2.2 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility Atoll provides assistants to help you define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 139 . Select the Guide Manufacturer from the list. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs. enter a Comment by doubleclicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue.2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. The context menu appears. 2. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides: 1. respectively.

Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Click OK. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and equipment that operate in the same frequency band. The cell is no longer marked in green. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. b. 5. 4. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 140 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Delete from the context menu.5. Select Add Record from the context menu. b. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment: 1. The context menu appears. You can use the Fill (Up. 2. Down. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and waveguide are compatible. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. Select the Frequency Band from the list. A dialogue appears. Right-click on the Links folder. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries.2. To delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: a. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Edit Grid from the context menu. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide or delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: To define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide: a. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennawaveguide pairs. 9. Right. Select the Equipment Manufacturer from the list.Atoll User Manual 8. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. 4.

Click OK. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 141 . 9. b. Click OK to close the properties dialogue. and waveguides: a. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. The context menu appears. e. c. Select Delete from the context menu. by default.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. delete a defined compatible antennaequipment pair. To define compatibility with an antenna. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/ waveguide pairs. a piece of equipment. Select Add Record from the context menu. d. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennaequipment pairs. To delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair: a. b. and waveguides: To define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment: a. Down. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. The context menu appears. Right. select the waveguides that you want to make compatible with this antenna/equipment pair. or define compatibility with an antenna. The context menu appears. the waveguides compatible with the corresponding antenna are selected. b. In the properties dialogue. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The properties dialogue opens. The cell is no longer marked in green. a piece of equipment. You can use the Fill (Up. these are taken into account and. Select Add Record from the context menu. under List of the Compatible Guides. Right-click on the square and select Record Properties from the context menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with the entries for the antenna and the equipment.

Atoll User Manual 142 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands .

Atoll User Manual 144 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

747-0 ITU-R F. breaking it into channels. Long-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading.749-2 Usually the frequency bands can be divided into three types: • • • "Long-Haul Frequency Band" on page 145 "Medium-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146 "Short-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands When planning a microwave link network.386-6 ITU-R F. Frequency sub-bands are standardised. The characteristics of microwave frequency bands are different depending on the frequency.385-7 ITU-R F.748-4 ITU-R F.636-3 ITU-R F. Each frequency band is in turn divided into a number of frequency sub-bands. Atoll enables you to define frequency bands and sub-bands. 5. The default frequency bands supplied with Atoll are based on the F-series ITU-R recommendations: ITU-R Recommendation Frequency Band ITU-R F.595-8 ITU-R F.1 Long-Haul Frequency Band A long-haul frequency band operates within a range of 2 to 10 GHz and can cover a distance from 45 to 80 km. The length of a microwave length is dependent upon the frequency: as the frequency increases.1. In this chapter. 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 15 GHz 13 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz 5. managing frequency bands and sub-bands is explained: • • • "Microwave Frequency Bands" on page 145 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands" on page 146 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands" on page 147.497-6 ITU-R F. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band.8 dB gain Horizontal and vertical Horizontal and vertical From 60 to 120 cm for a 34-40 dB gain Horizontal and vertical © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 145 . the length of the microwave link decreases. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 2 GHz 7 GHz 10 GHz 80 km 50 km 45 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Multipath fading Up to 370 cm for a 36 dB gain Up to 370 cm for a 46. By defining frequency bands you can determine the operational limits of a microwave link network.1 Microwave Frequency Bands Microwave links operate within a high frequency range (2-58 GHz).637-3 ITU-R F. The following table gives details of long-haul frequency bands.

There must be at least one frequency band that can be assigned to microwave links that are created. The context menu appears. 18 km Rain and multipath fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading From 30 to 120 cm for a gain of 35. and 27 GHz. Medium-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading. there is multipath fading as well. At 23 GHz. 40 km 35 km 20 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Rain and multipath fading From 60 to 120 cm for a gain of 36.66 dB 15 cm 15 cm Horizontal and vertical 15 km 10 km A few kilometers A few kilometers Horizontal and vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical b. At 38 GHz. Atoll includes several pre-defined. The Frequency Bands table appears (see Figure 5. At 55 GHz. ITU-compliant frequency bands.1 dB per km.94). and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. At 23 GHz.3 dB From 30 to 60 cm 30 cm for a gain of 39. 2. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 1 dB per km. 5. the frequency band experiences atmospheric attenuation of 0. for rain of 20 mm per hour.1. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. To create or modify a frequency band: 1. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0. for rain of 20 mm per hour.1.4-42. Short-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading as well as rain fading (for the lower frequencies in the band). 146 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 23 GHza 26 GHz and 27 GHza 38 GHzb 55 GHzc 58 GHzd a. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHza a. At 58 GHz. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. there is atmospheric attenuation of 12 dB per km. d.5-47. for rain of 20 mm per hour. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. The following table gives details of short-haul frequency bands.4 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-120 cm for a gain of 38-44 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-180 cm for a gain of 39-49 dB Horizontal and vertical At 18 GHz. Select Frequencies > Frequency Bands from the context menu.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands Microwave frequency bands are implemented in Atoll.Atoll User Manual 5. for rain of 20 mm per hour. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. c.1 dB per km.3 Short-Haul Frequency Band A short-haul frequency band operates within a range of 23 to 58 GHz and can cover a distance up to 18 km. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0.2 Medium-Haul Frequency Band A medium-haul frequency band operates within a range of 11 to 20 GHz and can cover a distance from 20 to 40 km.1 dB per km. 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. there is atmospheric attenuation of 5 dB per km. 26 GHz. for rain of 20 mm per hour as well as multipath fading. 5. By default. The following table gives details of medium-haul frequency bands.

Select Frequencies > Frequency Sub-Bands from the context menu. Max. Min.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands Figure 5. To modify a frequency band. 3.95). You can define a channelisation plan for the lower and upper half-band of each sub-band. ): 5. A frequency sub-band has two half-bands.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands Frequency bands can be divided into a frequency sub-bands. Figure 5. ITU-compliant divisions can have more than one frequency sub-band defined for a single frequency band. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. These half-bands are referred to as upper and lower half-bands. 5.94: The Frequency Bands table 4.95: The Frequency Sub-Bands table © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 147 . 2. breaking it into channels. Atoll automatically generates a channelisation plan or channel-to-frequency map using the information entered for the frequency sub-bands. Frequency (MHz): The maximum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency band. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. A duplex link usually uses one of these half-bands in one direction and the other half-band in the other direction. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. Comments: Any comments. Frequency (MHz): The minimum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). Note: The information necessary to define a frequency band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band. Frequency sub-bands are standardised. The context menu appears. To create or modify a frequency sub-band: 1. The Frequency Sub-Bands table appears (see Figure 5. To create a frequency band.

Atoll User Manual 4. To create a frequency sub-band, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency sub-band. Frequency band: The name of the frequency band to which the sub-band belongs. Reference Frequency (MHz): The reference frequency (in MHz). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): The lower half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): The upper half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). First Channel: The first channel of the sub-band. Last Channel: The last channel of the sub-band. Step: The step between channels. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency sub-band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. ):

5. To modify a frequency sub-band, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

5.3.1

Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band
You can find the information necessary to create a frequency sub-band in the appropriate ITU-R recommendation. In this example, the recommendation R F.747-0 (for 10 GHz) is used. On the first page of ITU-R F.747-0 (see Figure 5.96), you see that the recommendation is for Frequency Band 10 GHz.

Figure 5.96: First page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 On page 2, you see the information in Figure 5.97:

Figure 5.97: Second page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 The information on page 2 of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 gives you the following values: • • • Reference Frequency (MHz): 11 701 MHz (the reference frequency is the central frequency of the sub-band). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1204 MHz Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1113 MHz Important: Remember to include the negative sign ("-") when defining the lower and upper half-band shifts. • • • • Inter-Channel Space (MHz): 7 MHz (as indicated by "+ 7m") First Channel: 1 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Last Channel: 12 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Step: 1 (as indicated by "The 12 values of m from 1 to 12)

148

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6
Managing Calculations in Atoll

Atoll User Manual

150

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6

Managing Calculations in Atoll
Once you have created microwave links, you can make predictions to study how well your network functions: • • • "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151 "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154 "Defining Calculation Parameters" on page 156.

6.1

Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects
The following propagation models are available in Atoll for use in microwave projects: • Microwave Propagation Model: The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.1.1

Working with the Microwave Propagation Model
The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. When calculating attenuation, the Microwave Propagation Model takes free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due to diffraction, and tropospheric losses into account. If you want to analyse a microwave link, a propagation model must be assigned to it, as explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave Propagation Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.98: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters: K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.

Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

151

Clutter categories: Select a clutter category for each clutter class.833-4: Attenuation will be calculated according to ITU-R P. which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations. see the Technical Reference Guide. or 99.Click OK. Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. Atoll multiplies the loss given by the selected method to calculate the tropospheric scatter loss. The maximum attenuation is taken into consideration to calculate the attenuation due to vegetation. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model. 90%. Clutter categories are ITU-standardised clutter classes. ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%. 152 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i. The attenuation due to vegetation is calculated and displayed in link budget and interference reports for information only. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an Atoll-specific equation. Under Vegetation. It is not taken into account when calculating the total attenuation. For information on clutter categories. Alpha: Enter the value of the Alpha coefficient. 7. Figure 6. ITU-R P.e.833-4 recommendations. the clearance). N0: Enter the value for N0.99).Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration.Atoll User Manual Deygout Epstein-Peterson Deygout with correction Millington ITU 452-11 Full Deygout K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction. Under Tropospheric Scatter. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate attenuation due to vegetation: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. Clutter categories are taken into consideration when studying reflections and must be defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile.99: Microwave Propagation Model Properties . 6.. you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. A1 and Alpha coefficients are used to calculate the maximum attenuation experienced by a transmitter or a receiver site located within a vegetation area.99% of the time. A1: Enter the value of the A1 coefficient.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6.1.2

Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model
The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. It is an empirical model, but it takes more physical characteristics into consideration than the Microwave Propagation Model, which is why it is recommended for calculating interference. Assigning the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model to a microwave link is explained in in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.100: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under Reference attenuation not exceeded during the average year, you can set the following parameter: Required Time Percentage: Enter the percentage of time during which the global attenuation is not exceeded.

Under Rec. ITU-R P452 version, you can set the following parameter: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate the global attenuation (dB) between an interfering transmitter and an interfered (victim) receiver: ITU-R P.452-12 Simplified ITU-R P.452-8

6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.101).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

153

Atoll User Manual

Figure 6.101: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

7. Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.

6.2

Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives
In this section, the following are explained: • • "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154 "Defining Performance Objectives" on page 154.

6.2.1

Microwave Link Classes
Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types. Different link classes can use different performance objectives. By assigning microwave links to microwave link classes, you can assign the link classes targe parameters and usage limitations to the selected microwave links. To create or modify a microwave link class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Link Classes from the context menu. The Link Classes table appears. 4. Enter or modify the values in the table columns to create or modify a link class. Each link class has the following parameters: Name: The name of the link class Type: The type of link class (International or National) Sub-Class: The sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access, Intermediate country, etc.) Min and Max. L (M): The minimum and maximum length (in metres) for this link class.

The Atoll microwave module includes some pre-defined microwave links classes that are compliant with ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

6.2.2

Defining Performance Objectives
The ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performance events. As outlined in the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections; some error

154

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to the path or connection. These microwave error performance parameters are fully modelled in Atoll and include: • • • ESR SESR BBER

These error performance parameters are based on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error performance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections: • • • "Microwave Error Performance Events" on page 155 "Microwave Error Performance Parameters" on page 155 "The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives" on page 155.

Microwave Error Performance Events
Microwave error performance parameters are based on the following events: • • • Errored Block (EB): The EB is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits. Errored Second (ES): The ES is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. Severely Errored Second (SES): The SES is a one-second period with 30% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. Note: Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds can result in periods of unavailability, especially when there are no backup or standby procedures. Periods of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "failures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to the disconnection of switched services. The frequency of these events can be limited by limiting the SESR.

Background Block Error (BBE): The BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.

Microwave Error Performance Parameters
The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, the time for which the connection is deemed to be available (Savail) and the time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is in the available state. The parameters are: • • • Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ESR is the ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The BBER is the ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

In Atoll, you can define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance parameters. Atoll also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives based on the ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives
The performance objectives serve two main goals: • Performance objectives give the user of national and international digital networks an indication of the expected error performance under real operating conditions, thereby facilitating service planning and terminal equipment design. Performance objectives form the basis upon which performance standards are based for transmission equipment and systems in an ISDN connection.

Performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically feasible network, taking economic and technical constraints into consideration. The performance objectives, although expressed to suit the needs of different services, are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.

6.2.2.1

Defining Quality Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class in Atoll. Each quality objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant quality objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The performance objective equations define the behaviour of the quality parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Atoll includes by default the quality objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised quality objectives. To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create a new quality objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

155

Atoll User Manual 3. Select Performance Targets > Quality from the context menu. The Quality Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objective or create a new quality objective. To edit a ITU G.821 or ITU G.826 quality objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the quality objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.2.2.2

Defining Availability Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class inAtoll. Each availability objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant availability objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The availability objective equations define the behaviour of the availability parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each availability objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Note: The availability objectives are global objectives. They consist of three partial objectives as microwave link unavailability can be either due to rain, due to equipment failure, or random.

Atoll includes by default the availability objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised availability objectives. To modify pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create a new availability objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Performance Targets > Availability from the context menu. The Availability Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective or create a new availability objective. To edit a ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the availability objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.3

Defining Calculation Parameters
In a microwave project, parameters that affect calculations can be divided into: • • Global parameters: Global parameters are defined for all microwave links and affect all links. For information on setting global parameters, see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Link parameters: Link parameters are defined per link and affect individual links. For information on setting link parameters, see "Link Parameters" on page 159.

As well, any parameters set for the propagation model affect calculations: • • Microwave Propagation Model: For information on setting Microwave Propagation Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: For information on setting Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.3.1

Global Parameters
The global properties of a microwave links project are defined for all microwave links in the Properties of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The global parameters are those used for: • • • Quality and availability analysis Objective selection Interference calculation.

To define the global parameters for microwave links: for quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears.

156

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Calculation Details: Select the interference to be displayed in the results: none. on the uplink or downlink. you can define the following parameters: K factor: Select the K factor (the earth curvature factor) to be used in link analyses: Median value for each link: If you select this option.e. B >> A.. Worst channel engineering: If you select Worst channel engineering. parallel links are referred to as links sharing the same link extremities (e. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the result for the channel specified individually for Site A and Site B. No IRF graph is taken into account when the Co-channel Only option is selected. Click the General tab. Under Calculation Parameters. a median value for the K factor will be used for each link in link analyses.5 times the interfered bandwidth. Click the Models tab. select which channel should be displayed the results of a link analysis: All: If you select All. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 157 . objective selection. Distance: Enter the maximum distance in metres that Atoll will search around each site to find potentially interfering sites. On the Models tab. Interfered Bandwidth: Define which sites are to be considered as interferers. you can define the following parameters: Min. or on both the uplink and downlink. links with two channels). Results that do not meet the threshold will not be displayed. No Filter: There is no filter and all sites within the maximum distance are considered as interferers. Under Results. the parameters you define will be used for interference calculation. Calculate BER2: Select Calculate BER2 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER2 value. On the General tab. Atoll performs the link analysis using the values for BER1 and BER2 defined in the properties of each link. Atoll performs the link analysis for each channel and displays the results for the worst channel in terms of margin (i. On the Interference tab. Same value for all links: If you select Same value for all links. Calculated Port: Under Calculated Port. User-defined Percentage: If you select this option. Power control on the useful signal: Select the Power control on the useful signal check box if power control on the transmitted signal is to be considered. Ignore interference between channels of a same link: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore interference generated by channels of the same link on each other. the parameters you define are valid for all types of analyses: quality and availability analysis. Under Calculation Parameters. - Note: - Interference via repeaters: Select how interference caused by repeaters should be taken into consideration. Under Result filtering. the value you enter will be used as the K factor for all links in link analyses. you can define the following parameters: Max. or both. and interference calculation. the channel with the lowest margin). You can choose from the following options: Co-channel Only: Only co-channel sites are considered as interferer sites. In this context. Threshold Degradation: Enter the minimum degradation threshold.. 6. Atoll considers co-channel interference when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed the interfered bandwidth. 5.g. always off or is to be calculated according to geometric correlation. you can define the following parameters: The link direction to be analysed: Select the link direction to be analysed: either A >> B. Same value for all links: If you select this option.. Specific port engineering: If you select Specific port engineering. you can define the following options: Calculate BER1: Select Calculate BER1 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER1 value. the parameters you define will be used for quality and availability analysis. you can define the following parameters: Power Control: Define whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on. two links between the same two sites). Click the Interference tab. - Under BER. if you keep the default value of 250%.e. Values defined for each link: If you select Values defined for each link. Correlation Area: Enter the surface in km2 of the correlation area. Ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver. you can define a value for BER 1 and BER 2 that Atoll will use for all links. It also applies to parallel links. a site will be considered as an interferer when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed 2. you can enter the percentage of the interfered bandwidth that Atoll should consider when searching for interferers. Under Interferer Filtering. Therefore. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the results for all channels.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 4. This option is useful if you have links with 2+0 configuration (i.

you can define the following parameters: Reflective: Select the Reflective check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as relection areas. K. Click the Clutter Categories tab.530-8. For each clutter category. The type of ground is used to determine permittivity and conductivity values taken into account in reflection analysis. 7.530-10. you can define how quality and availability objectives are selected. 527-3. ITU-R P. number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES and for Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER. 20°C B: wet ground C: fresh water.Q. ITU-R P.530-12. you can set the following parameters: Multi-Path Propagation: Under Multi-Path Propagation.530.Q. On the Clutter Categories tab.826 recommendations or a customised objective). 20°C D: medium dry ground E: very dry ground F: pure water.821 or ITU-T G. Clicking the Browse button ( ) beside the Quality or Availability field opens a dialogue where you can define a priority for each selection criterion. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate availability. Selective Fadings: Under Selective Fadings you can define reference delay values for the secondary signal t (tau) for minimum and non minimum phase conditions. Erroneous Blocks: Under Erroneous Blocks you can define athe network level consideration values for the Residual Bit Error Rate (RBER). The following are the available types of ground: A: sea water (average salinity).Atoll User Manual Under Availability. Six availability analysis methods (Crane and those based on different implemented ITU recommendations. Soil type: Select the type of ground as defined in Rec. or it can be random. to equipment failure. Click the Objectives tab. or ITU-R P. 530-8.530-11.1058-2 and their characteristics. This tab lists all clutter categories defined in Rec.530-10. Under Performance Objectives Selection. the parameters you define will be used to analyse reflection and calculate vegetation losses.530: If you selected a method based on one of the ITU-R P.530 recommendations. ITU-R P. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate quality: Vigants-Barnett.530-5. 8. 530-11 and 530-12) are available. ITU-R P. Method: If you selected K. Under Availability Objectives Apportionment. Distance: Under K. define the distance. If you select a method based on one of the ITU-R P. On the Objectives tab. 838-1 and 838-3) are available. Reduction of XPD is taken into consideration when calculating unavailability due to multi-path and unavailability due to rain whereas signal enhancements have an impact on unavailability due to multi-path only. ITU-R P. Multipath Occurence: If you select recommendation ITU-R P. you can set further parameters under ITU-R P. 158 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Microwave link unavailability can be due either to rain (with its impact on propagation).530-11. method based under Method. Method. you can set the following parameters: Frequency Exponent: Under K. you can define the ratio between the different objectives considered in the global availability objective. ITU-R P.530-12. K. you can use either a simplified method or a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K). 530-10.530 recommendations under Method. ITU-R P. define the exponent of the frequency. The objectives can be selected according to the microwave link rate and the type of the objective (from ITU-T G. These weights are taken into consideration when calculating the performance objectives to be considered when analysing the microwave link unavailability due to rain and the unavailability due to equipment failures. Click OK.Q. the global availability objective consists of three partial objectives for which you can define a weight. Rain Model: Select the model to be used to calculate rain attentuation. If you select Vigants-Barnett. select the Ignore Signal Enhancements check box if you want to ignore signal enhancements and XPD reduction in multi-path propagation. ITU-R P. Therefore. - Under Quality. 530-5. Method. 20°C G: ice (fresh water) - 9.Q. Two attenuation models for rain (ITU recommendations. or ITU-R P. Vegetation with leaves: Select the Vegetation with leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones with foliage. the parameters you define will select objectives. Vegetation without leaves: Select the Vegetation without leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones without foliage. you can either enter the geoclimatic factor (K) value or use a simplified method or use a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K).Q factor.

and Display tabs. The link settings that affect calculations are on the Geoclimatic. The context menu appears. and Display. If no propagation model is defined for the useful link. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. Link class: Each link class can have different performance objectives. Under ideal circumstances a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. For an explanation of the options available on the General. Defining calculation parameters is explained in the following sections: • • • "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159 "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163 "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links" on page 165. Radio. Geoclimatic. the Reliability tab. Click the Geoclimatic tab (see Figure 6. 6. Right-click the link for which you want to set the calculation parameters. see "Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management". Radio. The Properties dialogue appears. Reliability.2. Click the Expand button ( 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 159 . The microwave link Properties dialogue has several tabs: General. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. and Propagation tabs and are described here.102). 2.3. and the Propagation tab. earth curvature factor (k). For information on creating a link class. the target values for quality and availability as defined in the link class are used. • • • The link parameters which affect calculations can be defined for a single microwave link and then applied to all microwave links or to a group of microwave links that share the same characteristics. rain intensity (exceeding 0.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 6. 6. Reliability. 4. Connections. Propagation parameters: A propagation can optionally be defined to calculate the useful signal and the interfering signal. Select Properties from the context menu. you assign the performance objectives to the link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Note: You can also access a link’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. this performance level is never achieved due to continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems with the equipment.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link You set the calculation parameters for a microwave link on three tabs of the link’s Properties dialogue: the Geoclimatic tab. Propagation. including climatic factor. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154.01% of time). Connections. PL percentage. ) to expand the Links folder. In practice. The margin calculated by the propagation model defined for the useful signal is also used to calculate the quality and availability of the microwave link. water vapour density.3. 5.2 Link Parameters The link parameters which affect calculations are the following: • Geoclimatic parameters: The geoclimatic parameters define the environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. temperature. Reliability parameters: The reliability parameters define the quality and availability of the microwave link. To define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link: 1. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K.

you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. click the Display All button under Current Methods.Atoll User Manual Figure 6. you can define climate-related settings affecting the microwave link: Current Methods: Under Current Methods. On the Geoclimatic tab. Temperate and Dry. Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. you can choose between Warm and Humid. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. To access all geoclimatic parameters independently of the methods you have selected. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. you can select the following climatic zones: Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as quality calculation method. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.102: Microwave link Properties dialogue . Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature 160 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . When using Crane as the availability calculation method.Geoclimatic tab 7.

you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. ITU-R P. -8. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. Rec. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. ITU-R P. you can choose between "Flat Terrain". The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm.530. ITU-R P. -8: Under ITU-R P. Rec. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. ITU-R P. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. you can select the Terrain Type. ITU-R P. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. the rainfall observed 99. Refractivity: Under Refractivity. for the K.530-5.835-3 (and select a season). -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. ITU-R P.530-8 calculation methods. ITU-R P.530: The parameters found under Rec. ITU-R P. Under Geoclimatic Factor. Rainfall exceeded 0.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre.530-12.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll based on Rec. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. you can define the PL factor. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water. or "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. if you select Terrain-based Method. K. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded). ITU-R P.530-5. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P.530-5. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P.453-9. you can enter the C factor value.835-3 (and select a season). or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. - - - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 161 . you can define the K factor. -8 and Vigants-Barnett.01% of the average year (or. Method: Under K. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file.530-5 and ITU-R P. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. in other words. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec.839-3 (and select a season). "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density.99% of the average year). or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. using a userdefined reference altitude. Under Refractivity. If you select User-defined under Multipath Occurence.1510-0. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file.Q. is displayed.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. the k factor median value. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). ITU-R P. ITU-R P. calculated using the set parameters.Q. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P.530-5. Method. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you select whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account.530-12: Under ITU-R P.530-5 or 530-8 methods.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec.836-3. ITU-R P. Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. ITU-R P.Q method. If you select Simplified Method. ITU-R P.. 530-5 or Rec.530: Under ITU-R P. the propagation condition factor for the VigantsBarnett method. you can define K. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre.Q. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km.835-3 (and select a season). The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. you can choose between "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. ITU-R P.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. or based on Rec.01% of the average year based on Rec.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0. Finally. If you are using ITU-R P.

Atoll User Manual 8. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class. On the Reliability tab. Availability: Under Availability. you assign the performance objectives to the link. you can define reliability-related parameters: Link Class: Under Link Class. Click the Reliability tab (see Figure 6.103). Click the Propagation tab (see Figure 6. 10. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. The MTTR is taken into account when calculating unavailability due to failures if the microwave link is not equipped with a hot standby channel system.104). you can set the MTTR (mean time to repair).Reliability tab 9. Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. For information on creating a link class. If the value for BER that you enter is not defined in the properties of the equipment. Each link class can have different performance objectives. Figure 6.103: Microwave link Properties dialogue . Atoll will interpolate to determine the corresponding sensitivity. 162 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atolldisplays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. you can select the link class. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154.

as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159.Propagation tab 11.3. If no propagation model is selected. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: © Forsk 2010 Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 163 . 6. 2. To copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links: 1. for example. You can set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links at the same time by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. - 12. The Links Table appears. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Right-click the Links folder.2.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. you can define propagation-related parameters: Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. On the Propagation tab. 2. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. Select Open Table from the context menu. Click OK. 3.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6. Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal.104: Microwave link Properties dialogue. The context menu appears. 5. 4. Copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. To define the calculation parameters for all microwave links: 1. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. in a highly homogeneous network. In the Links Table.

copy the values into all cells above the modified cell: a. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells above the modified microwave link. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. 7. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Select Edit > Fill > Up.Atoll User Manual PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. c. Click the modified cell.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 6. 8. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. b. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. copy the values into the cells below the modified cell: 164 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

The microwave links in the folder are grouped in separate folders by that property. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. Click the modified cell. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159. Right-click the Links folder. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by: Grouping the microwave links (see "Grouping Microwave Links" on page 165) Sorting the microwave links (see "Sorting Microwave Links" on page 166) Filtering the microwave links (see "Filtering Microwave Links" on page 168) 3. Ensure that you chose a property that all the microwave links you want to modify and the link with the modified calculation parameters have in common. Select Edit > Fill > Down. c. 2. 9.3. From the Group By submenu. 2. The context menu appears.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll a. select the property by which you want to group the microwave links. in a network that spans a great distance. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 165 . sorting the microwave links according to their common attributes. and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links in that group. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links but not for all links. 4. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells below the modified microwave link. Copy the defined calculation parameters to the selected group of microwave links. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. b. To define the calculation parameters for a group of microwave links: 1.2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Grouping Microwave Links To select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by grouping: 1. You can set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. 6. for example. 3.

Right-click the table column with the parameter you want to sort on. 5. Select Open Table from the context menu. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. copy the values into all cells in the group above the modified cell: a. The Links Table appears. For information on using the dialogue that appears. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. 4.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 8. 7.Atoll User Manual Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. 166 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . b. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Right-click the Links folder. Select Open Table from the context menu. 2. you can ungroup the links by right-clicking the Links folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. 6. 3. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. Click the modified cell. 7. In the Links Table. 5. Once you have finished copying the calculation parameters. The context menu appears. Right-click the folder with the grouped microwave links. 6. Sorting Microwave Links To sort the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. The Links Table appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.

Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells in the group above the modified microwave link. 9. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. 10. copy the values into the cells in the group below the modified cell: a. Select Edit > Fill > Down. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll c. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 167 . c. d. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Click the modified cell. Select Edit > Fill > Up. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. b.

Select the value to filter on. 6. Right-click the cell and select one of the following from the context menu: Filter by Selection: All microwave links with the selected value or values are displayed.106 on page 169). or you can use a value these microwave links do not have. Filtering Microwave Links To filter the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. 3. Filter Excluding Selection: All microwave links without the selected value or values are displayed. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 220 MHz) 168 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.105 on page 168). You can now filter on a value in the table. 5. press CTRL as you click the other values. You can now modify these microwave links as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 6. Figure 6. Right-click the Links folder.105: Filtering by selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. You can either use a value that all microwave links to which you want to copy calculation parameters have in common with the microwave link you previously modified.Atoll User Manual The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. 2. To select more than one value. Select Open Table from the context menu. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire Links table(see Figure 6. The Links Table appears. 4.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6. 7. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 169 .106: Filtering excluding selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63. 220 MHz) Note: You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. For more information on advanced filtering.

Atoll User Manual 170 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 7 Microwave Link Project Management .

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7

Microwave Link Project Management
The microwave links module enables you to plan, design, and analyse microwave link networks. Using Atoll's microwave links module, microwave link networks can be designed and analysed in separate Atoll projects as well as within 2G (GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects. Using Atoll's microwave links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio equipment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. You can define and set target performance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, defining the quality and availability targets. You can determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or over a hub with several links (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference analyses, and frequency planning. Atoll also enables you to design your microwave link networks while taking future growth and enhancements into consideration. Comprehensive analysis features in the Atoll microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-tomultipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies the required quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link's robustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number of failures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteria are described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. Atoll follows these standards and enables the user to set in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed. Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight be available, i.e., that there be a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it moves away from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take this dispersion into account and attention should be paid to objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referred to as "Fresnel Zone" clearance. Atoll's profile analysis feature permits allows you to view the line of sight, Fresnel zone clearance, and reflective surfaces along the link's profile. Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sight connection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link. Atoll fully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a microwave link. Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled. Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in Atoll is divided into two folders on the Data tab of the Explorer window: • • The Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can also contain sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects. The Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the definitions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. Each link refers to at least two separate sites in the Sites folder.

7.1

Designing a Microwave Link Network
Figure 7.107 depicts the process of creating and planning a microwave link network. The steps involved in planning a microwave link network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 7.107. 1. Open an existing microwave link document or create a new one ( 1 ). You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. You can create a new Atoll document as explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".

2. Configure the microwave link network by defining network parameters ( 2 ). You can define the equipment such as antennas, waveguides, and cables used in the network (see "Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment") You define and modify microwave frequency bands (see "Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Subbands").

3. Add sites and carry out basic evaluations of the candidate sites and locate more suitable locations for candidate sites ( 3 ). You can add sites or modify existing ones (see "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175). You can evaluate the location of existing sites (see "Site Survey Tools" on page 176) and search for new candidate sites (see "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184).

4. Create microwave links between sites ( 4 ). You can create a microwave link (see "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188) based on a link template. If necessary , you can modify the template on which new links are based (see "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190). If necessary, you can create repeaters along microwave links between sites. You can create multi-hop microwave links ("Creating Multi-hops" on page 208).

-

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

173

Atoll User Manual 5. Analyse the microwave network. You can analyse the path profile (see "Analysing the Path Profile" on page 193), adding passive repeaters if necessary (see "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201) ( 5 ). You can analyse the quality and reliability of the network (see "Analysing Microwave Link Reliability" on page 203) ( 6 ). You can study reflection along the microwave link profile (see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) ( 7 ). You can interference along the microwave link profile (see "Analysing Interference" on page 221) ( 8 ).

6. Plan link channels ( 9 ) "Planning Microwave Link Channels" on page 216.

Optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases, the last four steps can be repeated in order to achieve the optimum solution for the network. 7. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( 10 ). After modifying the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps 7 and 8 again.

Figure 7.107: Planning a microwave link network - workflow

7.2

Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites
As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project", you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point supporting one or more microwave links. Atoll enables you to verify the characteristics of each candidate in order to chose the best site. Additionally, Atoll has tools that allow you to search for new locations for sites. In this section, the following are explained: • • • "Creating Sites" on page 174 "Site Survey Tools" on page 176 "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184.

7.2.1

Creating Sites
When you create a microwave site, you create only the geographical point. The created site can then support one or more microwave links. In this section, the following are described: • • "Site Description" on page 175 "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175.

174

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7.2.1.1

Site Description
The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab (see Figure 7.108):

Figure 7.108: New Site dialogue Name: Atoll enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site. Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want. Pylon Height: You can define the height of the structure on which you can install antennas. Atoll can use this height in several analyses (site analysis, antenna height optimisation, etc.). Support Type: You can describe the nature of site. This field is for information only.

-

The Pylon tab:

7.2.1.2

Creating or Modifying a Site
You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 175, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.108 on page 175). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.

c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 175. 4. Click OK.

Tip:

If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

175

Atoll User Manual

7.2.2

Site Survey Tools
Atoll provides several tools to enable you to evaluate the line of sight around a site or between candidate sites. In this section, the following are explained. • • • • • "Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site" on page 176 "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176 "Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites" on page 179 "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180 "Displaying a 360° View Around One Site" on page 181

7.2.2.1

Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site
Atoll allows you to display the line-of-sight area around a site in the map window. To display the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears. 3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the following parameters: Max Distance: Enter the maximum distance around the selected site that should be taken into consideration. Site Height: Enter the transmitter site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Receiver Height: Enter the receiver site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Factor k: Enter a value for the earth curvature factor.

4. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and define the following: Frequency: Enter the operating frequency you want to study. Clearance: Enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.

5. Under View, define the display parameters of the line-of-sight area: To set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, move the slider. To define a colour for the displayed line-of-sight area, click the Colour button and select a colour from the palette that appears.

6. Click OK. Atoll calculates and displays the line-of-sight area around the selected site. To delete the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete Line of Sight Area from the context menu.

7.2.2.2

Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites
In Atoll, you can analyse the line of sight (LOS) between candidate sites. The analysis can be done for one particular site if one extremity of the microwave link is already locked or for all sites. In the analysis, Atoll considers the selected site(s) and all sites located within the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. For information on the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. To calculate a LOS report for one particular site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 7.109).

176

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

Figure 7.109: Setting the calculation parameters for a line of sight report 3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight analysis. 6. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 7. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

8. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

9. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. a. Click Add. The Field Selection dialogue appears. b. In the Field Selection dialogue, select the fields that you want to display in the report. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. To select a field to be included in the report, select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom.

c. Click OK to return to the Table tab. 10. Click OK. Atoll displays the selected results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

177

Atoll User Manual The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Distance (m): The distance between the sites. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. The result can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.110). Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. Antenna 1 Height (m): The height of the transmitting antenna. Antenna 2 Height (m):The height of the receiving antenna. Frequency (MHz): The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. Direction (°): The angle from Site1 to Site2 in the horizontal plane.

-

Figure 7.110: Line of sight clearance

Tip:

If you double-click one terrain section in the Line of Sight Report table, Atoll will automatically center it in the map and will display its profile in the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.

You can remove the line-of-sight sections by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the site’s context menu. To calculate a LOS report for all sites: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

6. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. 7. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 8. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

9. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

178

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. select the fields that you want to display in the report. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. The Field Selection dialogue appears. 6. the path containing the least of hops. Atoll considers the selected sites and all sites located within the focus zone. Atoll will use the computation zone. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. - 4. Antenna 2 Height: The height of the receiving antenna. the shortest path. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. 3. In the Field Selection dialogue. Atolllists all sites in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for information on the focus zone. Right-click the target site either on the map. Distance: The distance between the sites. As well. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.e. The routes can consist of several hops and have different lengths. Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). Click the Calculation Parameters tab. Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. Maximum Number of Hops: The maximum number of hops allowed between starting and target sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. To change the order of the fields. For information on the focus zone. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7. If you want. if no focus zone is defined. define the first k factor value. i. Select Routing from the context menu.2. define the following parameters: Source Site: The starting site. a. i. In the analysis. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 179 . Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. c. Frequency: The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Minimise the number of hops to reach the target: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of number of hops. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). 5. Antenna 1 Height: The height of the transmitting antenna. Click the Table tab.2. Under Height . The result can be between -100 and 100%. 2. To select a field to be included in the report. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. - You can remove the line-of-sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone.Transmitter Side and Height . see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. To find the best route between two sites: 1. On the Routing Options tab.e. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites Atoll allows you to find all routes between two sites fulfilling line-of-sight criteria. 7. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. Minimise the total path length: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of distance. Click OK.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 10. Click Add. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. b. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Atoll can display the route with the least of hops or the shortest route. The context menu appears. Click OK to return to the Table tab. 7. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. from top to bottom. 11. The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites.110). or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Under Earth Curvature Factors. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site.

It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. click to create the first analysis point. 2. When the frame appears around the site. b. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. Atoll displays the results in the Routing to Site table. Click OK. Then. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. The profile between both sites appears on the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. 180 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . click to create the second analysis point. 3. 9. 5. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). Clearance: If you want. Atoll considers the pylon heights defined for the selected sites to determine the profile. For each clutter class. indicating it is selected. you can check the terrain profile between two microwave sites. Node#: The name of sites been through by the route and the name of the target site. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. In addition. 4. Atoll displays terrain sections on the map between each site of routes (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). indicating it is selected. Atoll will use the pylon height defined on each site. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. define the following parameters: a. Distance: The length of the route.2. To study the terrain profile between two microwave sites: 1. see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176. Select how pylon height will be defined on both sites of the microwave link by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting one of the following: - Antenna Height Defined by Site: If you select Antenna Height Defined by Site. Node1: The name of the source site selected in the Routing Options tab. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites In Atoll. Move the pointer to another site on the map. You can modify them as well as the studied frequency in the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. Note: You can set further options using the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. The number of columns named "Node#" displayed in the Routing to Site table depends on the maximum number of hops defined in the Routing Options tab. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class: If you select Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class. The context menu appears. 7. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. 6.Atoll User Manual 8. Default Antenna Height: If you select Default Antenna Height. You can open the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting Properties. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. Click the Clutter tab. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance).2. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. The Routing to Site table contains the following information for each route. When the frame appears around the site. For a description of the options available in the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Under Penetration Condition. You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Right-click the Terrain Section tab. Move the pointer to the site on the map. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between both sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. 10. By default.

2. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design. 3. 2. Distance (m): The distance between Site1 and Site2. Site1: The Site1 name. you can use any terrain section to create a microwave link. select "Value Intervals. proceed as follows: 1. Site2: The Site2 name. For information on changing display properties. Atoll adds the new microwave link in the Links folder. To perform a 360° view at any site: 1. On the map. Click OK. 1. Pylon 1 Height (m): The pylon height on Site1 to be considered. 3. Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. It displays a Fresnel ellipsoid between both sites. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. - 9. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The context menu appears. Right-click the Terrain Sections folder and select Properties from the context menu." Under Field. Select 360° View from the context menu. Displaying 360° view around a site helps you to determine if the site is a good candidate and if it is visible from the other sites. If you have previously calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176). 2. Atoll opens the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. The 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7.2. Atoll uses the site heights. and terrain height and clutter along the profile. Pylon 2 Height (m): The pylon height on Site2 to be considered. 2. click the terrain section you want to analyse. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. Then. 1. 2. Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone. 4. you can colour them according to the percentage of clearance/ penetration of the Fresnel zone. Frequency (MHz): The frequency to be considered. its properties are based on the selected link template.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site You can display a 360° view around each site. Right-click the site either directly on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. 8. the k factor value and the frequency used for the LOS report calculation. Click OK to close the dialogue and apply the parameters.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. 7. In order to calculate the Fresnel ellipsoid. In the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. you have the following parameters: Id: The terrain section reference number. select "Visibility". Select the Display tab and define the following parameters: Under Display Type. The value can vary between -100 and 100%. On the map. Select Properties. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. If you have several terrain sections displayed on the map.111): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 181 .

Neighbour sites around the studied one are displayed according to their directions. To return from the Terrain Section tab to the 360° View tab: Click the 360° View tab in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. - 182 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. the visible part is represented by a solid line whereas the hidden part is indicated by a dotted line. the line is dotted. The curvature of the Earth (in m). To get information about a receiver site: Place the mouse cursor on the site in the 360° View tab.e.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the direction (in °) on the horizontal axis. This representation helps you select a receiver site among neighbours and determine at which height you should install an antenna on the receiver site. Two purple markers on both sides of the 360° View tab show the pylon height (i. The 360° View tab provides you with the following options: To center the receiver site in the map window: Click the site in the 360° View tab. The height of the studied site is indicated by a blue dotted line. if a site is partly visible from the studied site. The line position on the vertical axis depends on the site altitude which includes the Earth curvature. The pylon height (in m).111: 360° View Tool The 360° View tab shows the points of highest elevations in every direction around the selected site. The direction (in °). If it is entirely hidden by an obstable. the line is solid. Finally. If the site is entirely visible from the studied site. Note: The 360° View tab does not display any depth of field. To get information about a high elevation point: Place the mouse cursor on a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. The line lengths and the symbol position on the line depend on the receiver height defined in the 360° View Properties dialogue. A special pointer ( ) pinpoints the location of the current point in the map window. - To display the terrain profile between the studied site and the receiver site: Right-click the site in the 360° View tab and select See Terrain Section from the context menu. Each neighbour site is indicated by a vertical red line and its symbol. To view the exact location of a high elevation point in the map window: Click a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The point coordinates (in the display coordinate system). The distance from the studied site (in m). The direction (in °). Its distance from the studied site (in m). the maximum height not to be exceeded if you install an antenna on the site) defined for the studied site. The site is automatically selected and centered in the map window. The Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The site coordinates (in the display coordinate system). The altitude (in m).

10. Under Height . Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. : Increase the angle of view on the left.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. They are displayed in purple by default. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. respectively. - - Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters 1. Under Earth Curvature Factors. .Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management . 6. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 3. If you enter a beamwidth of 90° and an azimuth of 0°. Position of the Other Sites: When you select this option. define the first k factor value. 8. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. To change the angle of view and the azimuth of the studied site: Click the following buttons available on both sides of the 360° View tab. Right-click the 360° view tab. Height of the Selected Site: When you select this option.The clutter height at the point (in m). . : Decrease the angle of view on the right : Rotate the angle of view on the right.The altitude (in m). It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. b. Atoll will display the view between -45° and 45°. see “Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters” on page 183. 4.Transmitter Side and Height . 2. 5. define the following parameters: a. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. The context menu appears. Azimuth: Enter the azimuth of the selected site. Each site is indicated by a vertical line (red by default). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 183 . you can define the following parameters: Pylon Height: When you select this option. Click the Clutter tab. Select 360° View Properties from the context menu. To configure the 360° view calculation parameters and display options: Right-click the 360° View tab and select 360° View Properties from the context menu. Atoll displays two markers on both sides of the window to represent the pylon height defined for the studied site. For each clutter class. Atoll displays the position of other sites within the view. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. Beamwidth: Enter the angle of view to be considered. For information on parameters which can be changed. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box).The curvature of the Earth (in m). Then. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). 7. Click OK. On the Display tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. Atoll displays a horizontal line (a blue dotted line by default) to indicate the height of the selected site. Under Penetration Condition. 9. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. : Rotate the angle of view on the left. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. : Increase the angle of view on the right. : Decrease the angle of view on the left. Clearance: If you want.

you can define a receiver height for each clutter class. by letting Atoll find a higher location for it.Receiver Side on the Calculation Parameters tab. Atoll with display all line-of-sight areas in the same colour. Set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). in terms of reception and transmission.Transmitter Side. Under Height . Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. 6. c. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.Receiver Side. selecting a colour from the palette. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. you can select how receiver height will be defined at the far edge of the LOS area: Use heights defined per clutter class: If you select Use heights defined per clutter class. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site. Atoll will use the receiver height you define in the Default Height box. The intersection of lineof-sight areas will be calculated for sites in the computation zone (for information on the computation zone. You can improve the location of a site. Atoll will automatically assign a different colour to each line-of-sight area. Overlapping: Select Overlapping to display the line-of-sight areas with coverage from the defined number of sites: 184 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . define the first k factor value. by moving the slider. and the resulting display will show the cumulative line-of-sight areas. Define the type of clearance that will be calculated by selecting one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. On the Display tab. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line-of-sight area. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. 2. The context menu appears. You can also let Atoll display the mutually visible areas of multiple sites so as to find good places to create new sites. Under Earth Curvature Factors. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. To display the line-of-sight areas of several sites and display their intersection: 1. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue.Atoll User Manual 7. define the following parameters: a.3 Search Tools for New Sites Atoll provides different tools to find new microwave site locations. Right-click the Sites folder. Displaying the Mutually Visible Areas of Multiple Sites Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight areas for several sites and display their intersection. Unique Colour: If you select Unique Colour. 3.2. Click the Clutter tab. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter side of each microwave link: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. 10. you can define how the line-of-sight areas will be displayed on the map. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. 9. b. Under Penetration Condition. Clearance: If you want. 7. 8. and you will be able to distinguish the line-of-sight areas for each site. Click the Display tab. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. you can set the following: Receiver Height: If you want. Under Height . For each clutter class. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. - 11. as explained in "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19. 5. This is the value that will be taken into consideration if you selected Use heights defined per clutter class under Height . You can select one of the following display options: One Area per Site: Select One Area per Site to display a line-of-sight area for each site and then define the colour the line-of-sight areas will be displayed in: Automatic Colour: If you select Automatic Colour.

If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. etc. Atoll enables you to manage the microwave link parameters and their activity status globally or individually. Atoll enables you to create new microwave links by basing them on templates or by setting all the parameters for each new link. "Checking Data Consistency" on page 192. in Atoll. Repeater P: The name of a passive repeater on the link. Under Site B: you can set the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. • Frequency band: The working frequency band of the microwave link. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna positions as offsets with respect to the site location. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. respectively. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. installed at both. Dx and Dy. containing the user data. "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. The Properties dialogue has seven tabs: • The General tab: Name: The name of the microwave link. The Radio tab: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 185 . Only active microwave links are considered in reliability and interference analysis. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. In this section. one for transmission and one for reception. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Areas covered by at least 2 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 2 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 2 sites in the colour selected from the palette. see "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29. respectively. respectively. A site can support one or more microwave links or passive repeaters. The context menu appears. is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex mode. A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas. To delete the line-of-sight areas: 1. Activity: The microwave link activity status. "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190. Areas covered by at least 3 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 3 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 3 sites in the colour selected from the palette. "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. Comments: Any comment about the microwave link. Under Site A: you can set the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the options defined on the Display tab to the Legend. 2. X and Y. "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 192. "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300 MHz and 60 GHz. In Atoll. 13. 12. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. "Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template" on page 190. Repeater Q: The name of a second passive repeater on the link. Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies. X and Y. For information on the Legend window. "Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links" on page 192. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. Select Delete Line of Sight Areas from the context menu. Atoll displays results on the map. Dx and Dy. 7. The baseband signal. respectively.1 Definition of a Microwave Link The parameters of a microwave link can be found in the microwave link’s Properties dialogue. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end. 7. and is transmitted over the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the modulation scheme used.3 Creating Microwave Links A microwave radio link. Length: The calculated length. Areas covered by all sites: Check the Areas covered by all sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by all sites in the colour selected from the palette. Click OK. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna positions. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. transceiver equipment.3.. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location.

you can define antennas and characteristics for the both sites of the link Model: The antenna model. you can select up to two waveguides. the polarisation and the channel port status. you can define the following parameters: - - • The Connections tab: Under Waveguides and Cables. When the filter is active. - Under Frequencies. Separation: The distance between the main and the diversity antennas when space diversity is used on the site. ATPC value is considered in reliability and interference analysis only if power control is on. transmission and reception port numbers. If you want. Polarisation: The polarisation of the antenna to be used. whose frequency spacing corresponds to the standardised channel bandwidth calculated for the installed equipment. Select both options to make the microwave link bidirectional (i. values for transmission and reception attenuation. Diversity Ant: You can define if a diversity antenna is used at either site to improve reception. If you want. to allow communication in both ways). see "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. the appearance of the button changes ( )./Direct Ray: The tilt with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. Atoll proposes in the list antennas compatible with the selected equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Equipment Compatibility table. Maximum Power: The maximum power that the equipment can transmit. In this case. B>>A: transmission from Site B to Site A). Coordinated Power: The output power taken into account in calculations when power control is on. XPIC System: Select this option if the microwave link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Canceller). When the filter is active. ATPC: The power reserve used to increase the transmitted signal when it rains. By default. Height/Ground: The antenna height with respect to the ground (in metres). you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the - - antenna model field. This parameter helps Atoll determine which antenna pattern diagrams to use for calculations. it equals the central frequency of the frequency band. By default. Atoll lists all frequency sub-bands available for the microwave link frequency band. When the filter is active. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( model field. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby.. By default. You can configure the channels. Channel(s) can be selected only after choosing a frequency sub-band. Tuning: Define a value different from 0 dB if you do not want to transmit at maximum power. For information on taking power control into consideration. the appearance of the button changes ( ) beside the antenna ). Atoll lists equipment that operates in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. you can define either the frequency or the sub-band and channels. Under Antennas. This value is used when no sub-band is defined. Atoll provides in the list the sub-band. The value cannot exceed the Max ATPC value defined for the equipment. or frequency diversity. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the frequency sub-band field. In this case. the appearance of the button changes ( ). Port Settings: Click the Port Settings button to configure channel(s) in detail. or for both transmission and reception directions and select the waveguide model. port settings is not mandatory.e. Atoll proposes 186 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Ports Definition dialogue appears. Sub-Band: The frequency sub-band. the appearance of the button changes Under Equipment. If you want. you can define equipment related parameters for the both sites of the link: - ( ). For further information on port settings. Az. By default. This parameter is taken from the equipment properties. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the antenna model field. In this case. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. When the filter is active./Direct Ray: The azimuth with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. For other configurations. Nominal power: The output power after tuning. Note: Ports have to be configured if you use dual polarized antennas. Atoll lists antennas that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. This parameter can be defined for biderectional links only. Atoll proposes in the list equipment compatible with the selected antenna as defined in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. Half-band: Define which half-band (either the upper or the lower half-band) is assigned to the site. For each of them. Tilt.Atoll User Manual A>>B and B>>A: The direction of the microwave link (A>>B: transmission from Site A to Site B. Model: You can select a piece of equipment. Channels: The channel(s) allocated to the site. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Frequency: The frequency on which the signal is transmitted. In this case. you can define if it is used either for transmission or reception only. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m (where "n" is the number of channels in normal use and "m" is the number of channels available as standby channels). If you want. By default.

835-3 (and select a season).99% of the average year). ITU-R P.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature based on Rec. or based on Rec.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. ITU-R P.530: The parameters found under Rec.835-3 (and select a season).Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management in the list. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. To access all geoclimatic parameters whatever the methods you have selected. For more information on the geoclimatic file. click the Display All button available under Current Methods. ITU-R P. Atoll displays the attenuation. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 187 . ITU-R P. Under Connection Losses. Temperate and Dry. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. The different geoclimatic parameters are described below: Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. For more information on the geoclimatic file.530-12: Under ITU-R P. you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. Rec. For more information.01% of the average year (or. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. Rainfall exceeded 0. ITU-R P. waveguides compatible with the selected antenna and equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Waveguide Compatibility and Antenna/Equipment Compatibility tables.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0.835-3 (and select a season). you can define additional losses to be taken into account on transmission. You can also enter the length of each waveguide. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected in the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. ITU-R P. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. For more information on the geoclimatic file. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded).1510-0.01% of the average year based on Rec. you can select the following climatic zones: • The Geoclimatic tab: - Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as the quality calculation method. in other words. ITU-R P.836-3.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Current Methods: Under Current Methods. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. You can also add a Shielding Factor. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. ITU-R P. Rec. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. or on both transmission and reception. the rainfall observed 99. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. you can choose between Warm and Humid. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. ITU-R P.530-12. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. reception. ITU-R P. For more information on the geoclimatic file.

Under Geoclimatic Factor. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. - - • The Reliability tab: Link Class: Under Link Class.839-3 (and select a season). If no propagation model is selected. ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. you assign the performance objectives to the link. If you select the User-defined option under Multipath Occurence. K. Refractivity: Under Refractivity. for the K. The Display tab.Q. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. You can access the properties of a microwave link. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. you can define K. you can select the link class.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class.Q. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. you can choose between "Open Areas" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Under Refractivity.Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal. you can define the K factor. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". you can enter the C factor value. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Each link class can have different performance objectives. the k factor median value. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. If you are using ITU-R P. you can define propagation-related parameters: . 530-5 or Rec.530-5. -8 and Vigants-Barnett.453-9. -8. ITU-R P. Atolldisplays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone.530-5. using a userdefined reference altitude.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec. .3. you can select the Terrain Type. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m.Q method. ITU-R P. you can define the PL factor. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. The Propagation tab. • Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water and "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. Atoll displays the resulting sensitivity for each BER.530-5. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. -8: Under ITU-R P. ITU-R P.. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. you can define the appearance of the microwave link and its extremities. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. ITU-R P. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class.Q. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. Vigants-Barnett: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. Method: Under K. through the microwave link’s Properties 188 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. the propagation condition factor for Vigants-Barnett method.530-5 or 530-8 methods. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you define whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account. Method.530. If you select the Terrain-based Method option.Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal.Atoll User Manual Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link You can modify an existing microwave link or you can create a new microwave link. calculated using the set parameters. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. is displayed. If you select the Simplified Method option. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. For information on creating a link class.530-5. you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. you can choose between "Flat Terrain". • 7.530: Under ITU-R P.

The Ports Definition dialogue closes. Click OK. 3. Click OK. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 189 . ports are used to configure channel(s) in detail. The context menu appears. To define port parameters for a single microwave link: 1. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m. Click Apply. Click the Expand button ( 3. Right-click the microwave link you want to modify. In case of frequency diversity. b. 10. Additional parameters appear. ) to expand the Links folder. Click OK. The context menu appears. 4. port settings is not mandatory. 6. Rx port: The port number for the receiving equipment. 5. Defined the Half-band used on SiteA.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management dialogue. If you are creating a new microwave link: a. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Polarisation: The signal polarisation. Under Frequencies. Select Properties from the context menu. The context menu appears. b. 7. For other configurations. To create or modify a microwave link: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). You can configure port parameters for an individual microwave link or for all microwave links. you can define the opposite direction by clicking the Initialise Symmetrically button. The number must be from 1 to 10. 8. 13. To define port parameters for all microwave links: 1. two channels with diversity status are required. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. Tx port: The port number for the transmitting equipment. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Reception Attenuation: The reception attenuation in dB.3 Defining Port Parameters In Atoll. Right-click the Links folder. 9. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. The number must be from 1 to 10. 2. e. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. ) to expand the Links folder. The Links New Element Properties dialogue appears. Right-click the microwave link whose port parameters you want to define. Click the Port Parameter Settings button. Define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in one direction: Channel: The channel number. The Properties dialogue appears. They have to be defined if you use dual polarized antennas. After defining the configuration for one direction. Click the Expand button ( c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Ports > Open table. select a Sub-Band for the SiteA of the microwave link. The table opens. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Properties from the context menu. 3. Transmission Attenuation: The transmission attenuation in dB. 7. Right-click the Links folder. c. d. Define the following parameters: Link: the name of the microwave link. The context menu appears. 2. Select New from the context menu. 11. you can define either a frequency or the channels used. d. The microwave link’s Properties dialogue appears. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new microwave link or modifying an existing microwave link. Select the Radio tab. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. 4.3. 12. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). or frequency diversity. Modify the parameters described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185.

To place a microwave link directly on the map using a link template: 1. define the following parameters: Model: the link template you want to use in order to create the microwave link. The tools for working with microwave link templates can be found on the Microwave toolbar (see Figure 7. In the Microwave toolbar. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. 4. In case of frequency diversity. Select Using The Mouse On The Map from the menu. transmitters. On two existing sites using a link template. click the site that you would like to use as one extremity of the microwave link. but you can also create and modify microwave link templates. To create a microwave link on two existing sites using a link template: 1. 5. Select Between Sites from the menu. The microwave link is now created between the two sites. where SiteX is the name of the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created). In the Link Creation dialogue. select a link template from the list. Polarisation: the signal polarisation.3. The pointer changes ( The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you clicked on the map. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). 2. 4. Site A: the name of the site defining one extremity of the link.112: The Microwave toolbar In this section. Channel: the channel number. Click OK.112). the following are explained: • • "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 "Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 190 . select a link template from the list. If you are placing a new microwave link on two existing sites: a. Transmission Attenuation: the transmission attenuation in dB. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. ). 3. The site is now one extremity of the microwave link. The number must be from 1 to 10.5 Managing Microwave Link Templates Atoll comes with microwave link templates. In the map window. Figure 7. The Link Creation dialogue appears.3. Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10. Click once on the map to indicate the location of the first end of the link.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template With Atoll. If you are placing a new microwave link on two new sites: a. Move the pointer to the site that you would like to use as the other extremity of the microwave link and click it. Atoll names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX – SiteY. In the Microwave toolbar.Atoll User Manual Way: the link direction (AB or BA). The pointer now changes ( ). you can create new microwave links based on link templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. two channels with diversity status are required. By default. 7. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). and passive repeaters. b. The pointer now changes ( b. 3. 5. Click again on the map to indicate the location of the other end of the link. Site B: the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. 2. Reception Attenuation: the reception losses attenuation in dB. You can create a microwave link in the following ways: • • Directly on the map between new or existing sites using a link template. ). The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment. 7. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity.

5. or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. For information on the fields available in the open window. 2. 7. clicking them in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select one link or site. Click OK.3.1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template You can create a link template based on an existing microwave link. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. you can modify the properties of any link template. However. As well. 5.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template To add. select the link template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. You can also change the position of the site by dragging it. Click OK. Select Manage Templates from the list.5. In the dialogue that appears. To create a link template based on an existing microwave link 1. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from the map. 2. Click OK. you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the microwave link you want to use as template in the Map window. The new link template will be available in the template menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 191 . The new link template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. 4. or the Delete button to delete a user-defined field.5. Select Manage Templates from the list. You can now create a new link template or modify an existing one: To create a new link template: Under Available Templates. In the Radio toolbar. 7.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management • "Deleting a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 7.5. 4. Select Manage Templates from the list. 2. the Properties button to modify properties. select the link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create and click Add. Note: If you add a field to the link templates. The link template is deleted. select the template you want to delete. 4.3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template To delete a link template: 1. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears.3. In the Radio toolbar. you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. click the arrow to the right of the list. click the Add button to add a field. in a complex radio-planning project. 3. click the arrow to the right of the list. The Properties dialogue appears. In the Microwave toolbar. The new link template has the same parameters as the microwave link it is based on. Therefore. see "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191.3. although it might be visible in the map window. click the arrow to the right of the list. 3. Click the Fields button. The Properties dialogue appears. Click the Delete button. You can also create a link template based on a link template selected in the Link Template Properties dialogue. it can be difficult to find the data object on the Data tab. modify or delete a field in the link templates: 1. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. To create a link template based on an existing link template or modify a link template: 1.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map In Atoll. It is available in the list of the Microwave toolbar. Under Available Templates. you must add an equivalent field to the Sites table or the field will not be taken into account. To modify an existing link template: Under Available Templates. Select Save As A Template from the context menu. 2.3. 3. 7. The context menu appears. 5. If there is more than one link between the same sites or if there are two sites in close proximity. by selecting the existing link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create.

doing engineering and interference studies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time. define the parameters of the audit: Frequency Consistency: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify: Frequency band definition: The minimum frequency must be lower than the maximum frequency. Frequency sub-band definition: The frequency band must be defined. Antenna separation is a non-zero value when space diversity is used on a link. such as each site or microwave link.Atoll User Manual Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment": • • • • • • • "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18 "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20.) - Undefined Records: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify if there are undefined multi-hops (i. equipment.3. so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible. The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of some data. in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database. point-to-multipoints with no link). including from fields that you add. Consequently. Link definition: at least one direction must be selected. including from fields that you add. or unused repeaters. undefined point-to-multipoints (i.3. 7.): Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that: XPIFvalue of the equipment is a non-zero value when XPIC system is used on a link. Click OK to perform the audit. For example. Tooltips: You can display information about each object. 2. Microwave link colour: You can set the microwave link colour to display information about the microwave link. the antenna vertical and horizontal patterns must be correctly aligned at the extremities (Antenna patterns are correctly aligned when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the pattern electrical tilt angle. you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. might be responsible for the planning for only one city. The label is always displayed. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. This enables you not only to display selected information. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. or to distinguish inactive from active microwave links. The following tools can be used to display information about microwave links: • Label: You can display information about each object. Other (XPIC. For information on defining the tooltips. • • 7. excluded channels must belong to the list of channels and at least one channel must be available. too much information will lead to a cluttered display. For information on defining the label.e. the number of channels must not exceed the number of channels allowed by the equipment. you can restrict 192 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. In the Microwave Data Check dialogue.8 Checking Data Consistency You can perform an audit of the microwave link network.. For example. waveguides and frequency sub-band must be the same as the link frequency band and. a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. - - List All Verifications: Select this check box if you want to display all verifications performed in addition to detected inconsistencies. and when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle.e. such as each site or microwave link. Pattern attenuations are considered the same if they differ less than 1 dB. but also to distinguish microwave links at a glance.3. Select Tools > Data Audit > Microwave Data Check from the context menu. The Microwave Data Check dialogue appears. the channels must belong to the selected frequency sub-band. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. multi-hops with no link). You. in the form of a label that is displayed with the object.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links Atoll allows to you to display information about microwave links in a number of different ways. it is not necessary. In such a situation. the frequency defined must be within the frequency band limits. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. For information on defining the microwave link colour.. the frequency band of antennas. Antenna Separation. To perform an audit of the microwave link network: 1. 7. You can choose to display more information than in the label. Atoll displays the results of the audit in the Events Viewer. etc. you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish microwave links by frequency bands. because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. however.

or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied. you must configure its antennas.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. For information on graphic filters. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver sites. In addition. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. 2. • Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied.1. The main peak is the one that intersects the Fresnel ellipsoid the most. each with its own advantages: • Filtering the desired sites and microwave links You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. In this section. limits the number of sites and microwave links to be calculated. You can filter sites and microwave links according to one or more fields.4. interference). The diffraction attenuation is displayed above the peak.1 Displaying the Path Profile In this section. it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. In Atoll. You can make a microwave link profile analysis using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.4 Analysing the Path Profile Microwave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in Atoll. "Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile" on page 195. it is displayed in the profile tab by a vertical line in the profile. and the propagation model you want to use. "Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values" on page 197 7. For information on focus zones. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31. "Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options" on page 194. with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). You can combine a computation zone and a filter. this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a black vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction into account). At the top of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. For information on filtering. in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwave links to be studied. It includes any passive repeaters composing the link. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. see "Filtering Data" on page 62. "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201. its frequency band. Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu. Along the profile. When a repeater is inserted on the link. ) in The Profile tab provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site A to site B or vice versa. Before studying a microwave link. The context menu appears. see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 71.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile In Atoll. "Studying Microwave Link Clearance" on page 194. "Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights" on page 200. To open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window: 1.4. 7. equipment. you can select which part of the profile you want to display: • • • Site A ==> Site P Site P ==> Site B Site B ==> Site P © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 193 . if the signal meets an obstacle. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the distance on the horizontal axis. which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. 7. You can also open Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window using the Profile Analysis button ( the toolbar. you can make a profile analysis of a microwave link. "Zooming In on the Profile" on page 194. This enables you to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study. For information on computation zones. "Printing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 195. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Path Profile" on page 193.

both first and second. When displaying the clearance. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle that introduces the highest loss in the link. the clearance is referred to as F. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. The context menu appears. To hide or display the Fresnel zones: 1.4. the azimuths. A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depict the minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. You can also display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. a green coloured line is drawn from the transmitter to the first obstacle’s highest point. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids. Here. 8. it indicates the tilts/direct ray. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 3. 194 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . this feature is described in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section. The context menu appears.1. and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular. You can left-click the Link button in the Profile tab and choose from the context menu: • Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue. and reflection paths you want to display. the profile display options include Site Q as well. F1 for the first k factor value and F2 for the second one.1. On the Reflection tab. To open the microwave link profile display options window: 1. you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations and the manner in which the curvature of the Earth is displayed. 5.4. In addition. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.4. On the Ellipsoid and Antenna Beamwidth tab.Atoll User Manual • • • Site P ==> Site A Site A ==> Site B (profile "broken" at Site P) Site B ==> Site A (profile "broken" at Site P) When a second repeater (Q) is inserted on the link. Select Display Options from the context menu. 2. while the second related to the second k value is shown in red.1. 7. Atoll displays the clearance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k. you can define whether the reflections should be displayed or not. 4. Note: When 100% of the Fresnel ellipsoid is displayed.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance The Profile tab allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. Select Display Fresnel ellipsoids from the context menu. 7. You can view the microwave link profile with two different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor).3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options The Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool enables you to manage parameters that affect the display of the profile. 2. you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters.4 Zooming In on the Profile Atoll enables you to zoom in on the profile. 4. F’1 for the first k factor value and F’2 for the second one. the clearance is referred to as F’. either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unobstructed ones. 3. The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue. If there are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses. Select the microwave link to analyse. and the angles of incidence for both antennas. Select the microwave link to analyse. These values can be set through the advanced options available by clicking the button ( ) opposite the Link list. On the Display tab. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 7. and whether you want to display the antenna beamwidths for transmitter and receiver sites. When the percentage of the Fresnel ellipsoid is different from 100%. it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically. you can hide or display the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link. 6. Click OK. 7. you can define the percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellipsoids to be shown.

6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile You can display the clearance values of a microwave link using either the Profile tab or the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool. 7. In this section. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 6. Select Print from the context menu. 5. When you release the mouse button. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu. 3.1 Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile.1. 4. 4. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 195 . The context menu appears. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. Select the microwave link to analyse.1. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Select the microwave link to analyse. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To zoom in on the Profile: 1. To print the content of the Profile tab: 1. To restore the initial profile: 1. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu.4. A separate window opens displaying details of the selected point. 5. The context menu appears.1. Drag to the opposite corner. 3. Select Zoom In from the context menu.4. The window displays the following information for each selected point along the profile: Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. 2.113). Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. Select Display the current point information from the context menu. (see Figure 7. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile You can print a microwave link profile. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. 3.4. 4. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Distance up to Optical Path: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. 2. 5. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 2. Click OK to print. To display the details on a point of a microwave link profile: 1. The context menu appears. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. 2. the following are described: • • "Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 195 "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196 7. 4. Select the microwave link to analyse. 3. Move the pointer along the profile.6. 7. Select the microwave link to analyse.

Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Select Engineering > Values from the context menu. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. Clutter Height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer 7. Clutter: the clutter class. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. To display the profile data using the Values tab: 1.113: Microwave Link Analysis window – Profile tab As as you drag the pointer along the profile in the Microwave Link Analysis window. Clearance: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. You can also access the Values tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Values tab. the following information appears in a tool tip: Coordinates: The cursor coordinates given in the display coordinate system.6. This value is relative to the bottom of the Fresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value. Fresnel Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value.1. Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile. 2. Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files).2 Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to view all the profile analysis data for each selected point along the microwave link profile. the pointer changes ( ) to indicate the location of the current point along the profile in the map window. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. 196 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (percentage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). Atoll displays the details in a separate window.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value.4. The context menu appears. When you place the pointer on this special cursor. The Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window displays the following values for each point along the profile: Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site. Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model.

. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 197 .g. The resolution of the information given depends on the resolution of the geographic data: information is given every X metres. To edit the profile values in the table: 1.114: Penetration and clearance values on the Values tab 7. the clutter class. Right-click the profile view.7.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished updating the table.1. the clutter height and the clutter category) can be edited in the table or using the mouse. To edit profile values using the mouse: 1. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.4. Figure 7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. You can modify some profile values at any point along the profile and immediately check the impact of these modifications in the Profile tab.1 Editing Profile Values Some values (e. Click the Edit button.1.115: The Values tab when editing. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field. You can edit the following columns: Altitude: The altitude (DTM) Clutter: The clutter class Clutter Height: The clutter height Category: The clutter category. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Editing Profile Values" on page 197 "Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones" on page 198 "Copying and Pasting Profile Values" on page 199 "Exporting Profile Values" on page 199 "Importing Profile Values" on page 199 "Saving the Edited Profile Values" on page 199 "Refreshing the Profile Values" on page 199 7. the altitude. where X is the highest resolution of clutter class and DTM maps. 3. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 3.4.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values The geographic details provided on the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool are stored in a table.115). 2. In this section. 2.

2 Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones When you are editing the profile as explained in "Editing Profile Values" on page 197. 5.117: Clutter heights in edit mode. Figure 7. Click the line.118). you can view reflection areas and vegetation zones. Clutter: Select Clutter if you want to edit clutter classes (see Figure 7. 198 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Drag the line to change the area with the corresponding clutter category. ii. i. click one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 6. The clutter classes are displayed with lines separating the clutter classes if clutter heights are defined or with points if clutter heights are not defined. ii. i. In the profile. Click the point you want to edit.119: Clutter categories in edit mode. Clutter Height: Select Clutter Height if you want to edit clutter heights (see Figure 7.116). Figure 7. Drag the point to its new altitude. The pointer changes ( ). Drag the line or point to change the area with the corresponding clutter class. The pointer changes ( ).4. 7. Figure 7. Select Zoom In from the context menu. Select one of the following columns in the table: Altitude: Select Altitude if you want to edit ground altitudes (see Figure 7. The pointer changes ( ). Category: Select Category if you want to edit clutter categories (see Figure 7. The pointer changes ( ).Atoll User Manual 4. ii. Click the line or point. ii. 7. i. You can see lines separating the clutter categories.119). Drag the point to its new clutter height.118: Clutter classes in edit mode. Click the point you want to edit.116: Ground in edit mode. Figure 7. Drag to the opposite corner and release the mouse button.117).7. i.1. Atoll zooms in on the selected area.

press CTRL+U. and clutter categories in the table. Hide Zones: Select Hide Zones to hide reflection areas and vegetation zones. Click the Edit button.4. To import data into the table: 1. Vegetation zones without foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ). The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells.4.115). Zones with foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ). Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage to view vegetation zones without foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses. To restore the original link profile values: 1. the changes are not automatically saved and will be lost if you select another link or if you close the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 7. The Import dialogue appears.115). Click the Edit button.4.4. Click the Edit button. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.7.e.115). To export profile values: 1. clutter heights.7. Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage to view zones with foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses.115). Only editable values (i.7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.7 Refreshing the Profile Values You can restore the original link profile values from the geographic data diles and replace the edited values. Define export settings as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. - - 7. altitude.1. To save the edited profile values: 1. To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells.5 Exporting Profile Values You can export the entire table or selected columns to ASCII text files (in TXT or CSV formats) and MS Excel files.4. you can save them in the link properties. 2. 2. Click the cell with the data you want to copy and drag to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Click the Actions button and select Import. press CTRL+D. Reflection areas are displayed with a pattern ( ). clutter heights. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Click the Edit button.3 Copying and Pasting Profile Values You can copy and paste some profile values such as altitude. Display Slopes: Select Display Slopes to view the slope of the selected reflection area.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To display reflection areas and vegetation zones: 1.115). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 199 . Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Click the Edit button. 2.7.1.. 4. Click the Edit button. 7. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 2.115). The Export dialogue appears.1. 3. Click the Actions button and select Commit Values to Link. If you want. click the Actions button and select Paste. Right-click the profile view and select one of the following options from the context menu: Display Reflection Areas: Select Display Reflection Areas to view reflection areas taken into account in the reflection analysis and reflecting paths.6 Saving the Edited Profile Values When you edit the data in the profile table. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the clipboard into the selected cells.7. To copy and paste profile values in the table: 1. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Click the Actions button and select Export.1. 3. 4. 2.1. Define import settings as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. 4. You must already have selected Display Reflection Areas if you want to Display Slopes. 3. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. clutter classes.4 Importing Profile Values You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of the Values tab. 3. 2. 3. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. clutter classes. and clutter categories) can be imported. 7. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 7.

Atoll User Manual 3. In this section. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 7. ). Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). The Height Optimisation dialogue appears. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site.4. from the context menu. In Atoll. When defined. Click the antenna height pointer ( height. from the context menu. To modify antenna heights using the mouse: 1. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ) and enter the exact antenna height. 7.2. you can modify or optimise microwave links antenna heights. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. Atoll allows you to calculate and adjust the microwave link antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Click the Actions button and select Refresh Geo Data.4. 4. ) (the pointer changes ) and drag it up or down to modify the antenna 3. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Atoll will determine antenna heights in order to fulfil the highest constraint. 3.4. The context menu appears. 4.2.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights When designing a microwave link network.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse You can use the mouse to modify the antenna height of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. Using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. When defined. you should define the antenna height to avoid any obstruction of the line-ofsight signal and reflections.2. The context menu appears. 2. Select the optimisation method: Clearance Condition Method: The Clearance Condition Method is based on the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. To modify the antenna height: 1. the following are explained: • • • "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200. you can modify antenna heights using the mouse or enter new values and see the clearance and penetration parameters displayed. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Click the button beside the microwave links list ( 3. 7. Select Optimisation Method from the context menu. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 200 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Save Hx and Tilt.4.2 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights You can enter a new height for the antenna of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 2. You can enter one or two values of the k factor and define for each of them a target clearance. To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna: 1. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab.3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights Atoll enables you to automatically calculate antenna heights in order to avoid reflections and profile obstructions. Select Save Hx and Tilt. The context menu appears. 2. 4. 7.

a "repeater" is always a "passive repeater. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 201 . Furthermore. distortions and rain etc. ) for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise. these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab Name: The passive repeater name. Choose Optimise to calculate the optimum antenna heights for both extremities. In Atoll. you can estimate the growth of vegetation (Projected tree or foliage growth).. Select Save Ha.Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. . Only the height of the other antenna (assuming it is not loced as well) will be calculated to optimise the link.1 Description of a Passive Repeater The parameters of a passive repeater can be found in the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. 7.. respectively. these height limits are represented on the Profile tab.4. It enables you to calculate optimum antenna heights for two-site microwave link profiles (e. This enables you to prevent the antenna height from being modified during the optimisation process. The second type is a plane reflector type passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. 7. X and Y. it is not accessible for microwave link profiles involving one or more repeaters. There are two main types of passive repeaters. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab). The following sections explain how Atoll models passive repeaters. The context menu appears. Minimum Diffraction Loss Method: Atoll determines antenna heights to minimise diffraction losses due to the main obstacle (i.e.3 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater Passive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. 9. . Site Site B or Repeater P Site B). 6.g.The context 8. it calculates antenna heights to get a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone). The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connected by a short feeder cable. 10. i. Passive repeaters divide the radio path into two branches. you can always restore the last antenna height value by selecting Restore from the same menu.4. 7..Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management If you have out-of-date clutter class maps. Click OK." In this section. 5. the following are explained: • • • "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. if you wish. respectively. These advantages mean that passive repeaters can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas. Atoll takes this value into account for clutter categories from 6 to 14 and adds it to the clutter height. "Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater" on page 202. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates.Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location. these are often called passive reflectors or plane reflectors. Atoll can model both types of passive repeaters and provide you with access to all the relevant parameters. Dx and Dy.e. You can also use the context menu to lock the antenna height.3. This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles. Antenna Position: You can modify the Antenna Position. normally having different lengths and different inclinations. each traversing different type terrain. Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites: • • • • • No power is required No regular road access is required No equipment housing is needed They are environmentally friendly Little or no maintenance is required. Due to this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders". If defined. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading. Select the Take into account the reflection areas check box and define the range of k factor values (kmin and kmax) to be used during the antenna height optimisation if you want to take reflection into consideration. Hb and Tilts from the context menu to save the current antenna heights and tilts in the microwave link. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Site: The site where the repeater is located (from the Sites table). "Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 202. Right-click the the antenna height pointer ( menu appears. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ).

The Passive Repeaters table appears. c. define the antenna height. f.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll. 4. described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site. 3. If you are creating a new passive repeater: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater You can modify an existing passive repeater or you can create a new passive repeater. To create or modify a passive repeater: 1. 7. d. The Passive Repeaters New Element Properties dialogue appears. define these parameters: Surface: The surface area for the repeater. or modifying several existing passive repeaters. • The Type tab Type: Define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type repeater. e. By default.3. you can create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse. Right-click the Links folder. see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.3. Tip: If you are creating several passive repeaters at the same time. You can open the Passive Repeaters table by rightclicking the Links folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. In this case. When you create a passive microwave repeater. you can choose the antenna. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of transmission. Click OK. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of reception. Under Antenna2. ) next You can access the Properties of the selected site and frequency band by clicking the Browse button ( to the corresponding item. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new passive repeater or modifying an existing passive repeater. Select Passive Repeaters > New from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Select Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. d. you can choose the waveguide and define the length. Azimuth: The azimuth towards the site of transmission. Height: The reflector height. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the repeater. and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisation. For a reflector type repeater. You can click the Calculate button ( - For a back-to-back antenna type repeater. you can add it to an existing site. If you want. through the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. The context menu appears. you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Passive Repeaters table. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. For information on copying and pasting data. Under Waveguide. you can choose the antenna. 202 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can access the properties of a passive repeater. Select Record Properties from the context menu. Tilt: The tilt angle towards the site of transmission.4. The context menu appears. define the antenna height. Atoll proposes in the list waveguides compatible with the selected antennas as defined in the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. Right-click the passive repeater in the Passive Repeaters table. b. the appear- ance of the button changes ( ). The passive repeater’s Properties dialogue appears.4. You can click the Calculate button ( ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. or have Atoll automatically create a new site. Modify the parameters described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. 7. 2. When the filter is active. Right-click the Links folder. define the following parameters: Under Antenna1. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the model field. c. b.

you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Click the arrow next to New Repeater button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. Ideally. Reliability analysis takes into consideration the parameters of fade margin. You can select it from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Site Q Site B. diffraction loss. antenna parameters. radio parameters. or directly on the map. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 203 . Select the microwave link. In this section.1 Analysing a Single Microwave Link When you create a microwave link. represented by the site symbol ( ). Site A Site B Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections. define the microwave link class and related performance objectives and set the calculation parameters. You can assign a propagation model to all microwave links at once. Note: You can also insert a repeater in a microwave link by selecting Insert Repeater from the microwave link’s context menu and then clicking on the microwave link where you want to insert the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map. For example: Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section. Site Q Site P. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151. or to a single microwave link. One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any). Select Panel Reflector or Back-to-back Antennas from the menu according to the type of passive repeater you want to create." A section can be: One of the directions of a bi-directional link. Click the map to place the repeater. Before analysing the microwave link reliability. 3. For information on defining the properties of the new microwave passive repeater. this performance level is never achieved over any microwave link due the continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment. "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 208. or to a single microwave link.5. Calculation parameters include global parameters applied to all microwave links and link parameters such as geoclimatic and reliability parameters defined per link. Site P Site Q. 2. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the microwave link path. see "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. This allows you to predict the received signal level and to calculate the thermal fade margin. to a group of microwave links. A microwave link reliability analysis determines whether a designed system will operate successfully. The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency band assigned to the microwave link and azimuth(s) for the repeater antenna(s) are calculated according to the directions of the two sections of the microwave link.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Atoll permits a maximum of 2 passive repeaters in a single microwave link. Site B Site Q. a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. The following terms are used in Atoll for passive repeaters and related parameters: • • Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively. 7. To create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse: 1.5 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability Reliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessing its performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. 4. you must assign a propagation model. Assigning a link class is explained in "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154. In practice. Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types and give target performance objectives to microwave links. Site P Site A. "Analysing Microwave Links" on page 206. to a group of microwave links. transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses. Defining global parameters is explained in "Global Parameters" on page 156. terrain roughness calculations. 7. average annual temperature. the following are explained: • • • "Analysing a Single Microwave Link" on page 203. Setting link parameters is explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. A part of the link is called a "Section. Atoll automatically creates a new repeater in the Passive Repeaters table and a new site in the Sites table that is assigned to the newly created repeater. You can assign a link class to all microwave links at once. Site A Site P. The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annual basis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. Site A Site B and Site B Site A Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections.

antennas used at both sites with their respective models. Therefore.e. • • • • • 7. BBER). minimal channel bandwidths. heights. Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity. the link length. Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calculations. a snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window in order to facilitate direct visualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report and an extract of the map window showing the studied link and the surrounding area. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. azimuths. it is possible to modify the properties of the microwave link. Furthermore. its length and calculation parameters (propagation model. modulation used. the operating frequency band of the microwave link. the equipment installed at each site (name. 2. compatible digital hierarchy.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins Atoll allows you to determine the margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined in the link class. modulation used. "Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters" on page 205. calculated and required thermal fade margins and calculated and required composite fade margins) and the required total margin. a global estimation of the cut off duration over an average year taking into account both link quality and availability. diameters and near fields.1. ESR. This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section. • • 204 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . i. tilts. Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. capacities and configurations. or the calculation parameters. the thermal fade margin. The context menu appears. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. The Report tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window contains the link budget for the link being studied. the worst month quality (in % of time) and the average annual availability (in % of time). This will open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window with the EPO tab displayed by default. minimal channel bandwidth and the configuration). Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu. and altitudes for both extremities. BBER) and availability objectives (SESR. gains and diameters. Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive fading. any modifications made to the profile of the microwave link using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window or any modifications in the geography of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are taken into account in the link budget on the Report tab. repeaters (if any). total losses comprising filter losses. transmitter powers. data rates. location. ESR. and immediately display the impact of the modifications in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window (both Profile and Report tabs). To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link: 1. The microwave link required margins are listed on the EPO tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 2. a basic budget including the operating frequency band. the following are explained: • • • • • "Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins" on page 204 "Calculating a Microwave Link Budget" on page 204. Select Engineering > Report from the context menu. you can read whether quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. Moreover. Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters. digital hierarchy employed.2 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget Atoll provides you with a detailed microwave link budget tool. margin against enhancements. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each studied microwave link as detailed below. gains. how much you have to decrease or increase the maximum power and the required antenna diameter. whether discrimination reduction and enhancements are taken into account). capacity. ATPC effects.. To calculate the microwave link required margins: 1. the results provided in this report are calculated in real-time. You can also open the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Report tab. margin against discrimination reduction. altitude and coordinate system). tilts. azimuths. Requirements: the required output power you can compare to the current output power displayed in brackets. heights. Microwave link budget results on the Report tab include the following information: • Summary: Under Summary. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. site names. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antenna details such as the models. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total required margin. Microwave link required margin results on the EPO tab include the following information: • Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name. The context menu appears. "Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report" on page 206 7.5.5. This tab contains the report generated after the calculation of required margins.1. locations. quality objectives (SESR. rate. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map.Atoll User Manual In this section. Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. models for availability and quality calculations. passive repeater gains (if any).

Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. When you have finished modifying analysis parameters. 7. details for the average year (rain fading. Propagation: the nominal received signal level. BBER). diffraction losses. You can set the following options: Take Space Diversity Into Account: If you want to take space diversity into account. These results include the outage probability. if it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising filter losses. shielding losses. For further information. temperature. interference. The context menu appears. and waveguides and cable losses. free space loss. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. earth curvature factor (k). the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. PL percentage. Take Frequency Diversity Into Account: If you want to take frequency diversity into account. The Microwave Radio Link Properties dialogue appears. Inverse Polarisation: Select the Inverse Polarisation check box if you want to take inverse polarisation into account. These results include the outage probability. and waveguides and cable losses. and availability objectives (SESR.1. Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. These results include availability of hot standby. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 205 . the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). Gain difference between antennas: Define the difference of gain between both antennas. climatic factor. BBER (required)). the outage probability. the port circulator and attenuator losses. the polarisation. click the Actions button.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management connection losses. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required).. enhancement forecast). rain intensity (exceeding 0. ESR (required). and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). shared losses. select the Take Space Diversity into Account check box and define the following: Distance between antennas: Define the distance between main and diversity antennas. To modify calculation parameters for analysis: 1. 4.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by changing some calculation options.5. BER values. click one of the following: Save in the Link: Click Save in the Link to save these changes in the microwave link properties and click OK to close the dialogue. shared losses. shielding losses. outage probability due to faults for the average year and the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. BBER). ESR. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is taken into consideration in total attenuation). thermal noise. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. 2. Click OK to check the impact of the selected options on the report. the channel. quality objectives (SESR. space diversity and frequency diversity). water vapour density. click the Actions button. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. You can define the studied port. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). ESR (required). Select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. quality model. selective fading. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. overflow thresholds. 2. the transmission and reception port numbers. The Hop Analysis Parameters dialogue appears. 3.01% of time). etc. Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. BBER (required)). Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. 3. fading due to discrimination reduction. connection losses. port connection losses. rain attenuation. select the Take Frequency Diversity into Account check box and define the number of separation channels. To modify analysis parameters for a link: 1. the outage probability. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). or change calculation models. losses due to water vapour. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. OK: Click OK without clicking Save in the Link to check the impact of the selected options on the report without modifying the microwave link properties. the corresponding frequency. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both direction. fading due to discrimination reduction). polarisation at both sites. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. ESR. The context menu appears. Select Calculation Parameters. availability model. Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. • • • • • • • • This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. losses due to dry air. port connection losses.

filtered (i.e.g. and intersect the computation zone. click the Actions button and select Configure Report. 7. select the Reset button. d. select the AaBbYyZz button.. the following are explained: • • • • "Setting a Microwave Link as Active" on page 206 "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207 "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207 "Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity" on page 208 7. In this section.1 Setting a Microwave Link as Active Once microwave links are set up within a network. Microwave links in Atoll can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters (e. c. 7. b. that are selected by the current filter parameters). The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. you can print them or export them. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). Atoll carries out the calculation for all microwave links in the subfolder that are active. In other words. You can choose beween Align Left. 2. availability and interference analyses and associated reports and statistics only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered 206 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .2 Analysing Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave links simultaneously. The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. a. select its check box. To display a result. 4. you can create a computation zone. Select Print in order to print the link budget report. a. To change the font. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. Click one style. Before calculating one or more link budgets. Quality. Click OK. if you have drawn a computation zone. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. clear its check box.2. Choose how to align the paragraph. by frequency band). Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. Click the Style tab. a. Centred and Align Right. To configure the report display: 1. select the Reset button. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. you can decide whether or not to activate them.Atoll User Manual 7.5. b. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears.1.5. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links in the subfolder that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. When you create a computation zone. To restore the initial style. Click the Contents tab. d. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available.1. b.5. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). The results are displayed in the form of a report.5.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report and EPO tabs to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. click the Actions button in the window to open its context menu. 3. If there is no computation zone defined. You can launch simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave links grouped in a subfolder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category.. When working with a large network.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report After you have configured the reports displayed in the Report and EPO tabs. c. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. To print or export the report: 1. Select Export in order to export the link budget report in RTF format. The Report Configuration dialogue appears. To hide a result. For information on the computation zone.

select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report Before calculating the link budget.5. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. Select Activate Links from the context menu. you can set the propagation model and other calculation parameters. b. To set an individual microwave link as active: 1. see "Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll". Define the content of the report: a. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. from top to bottom. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links table: 1. Click OK to validate the selection of fields to be displayed in the report. 7. The context menu appears.2. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model and calculation parameters. To define the content of the link budget report: 1. The next time you configure a report. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. 3. Select Open Table. Select Active Link from the context menu. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. 7.5. 4. 5. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. select the check box in the Activate column. Right-click the microwave link you want to activate. The context menu appears. In the Field Selection dialogue. 2. you can define the content of the link budget report. active microwave links are displayed in red ( links are displayed in grey ( ). 4. Select the microwave links you want to set as active: To set all microwave links as active. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets You can calculate a link budget for all microwave links or for a group of microwave links. The Field Selection dialogue appears. inactive You can set an individual microwave link as active from its context menu or you can set more than one microwave link as active by activating them from the Links context menu. Click the Expand button ( 3. The Links table appears with each microwave link’s parameters in a second row. Click Add. 3. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.2. Select Link Budgets > Properties from the context menu. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. right-click the Links folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 207 . To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. Once you have ensured that all microwave links are active. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 5. ) in the Links folder. The transmitter is now active. 4. ) to expand the Links folder. The context menu appears. To select a field to be included in the report. 2. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. 2. c. To change the order of the fields. To set a group of microwave links as active. For each microwave link that you want to set as active. In the Explorer window. Right-click the Links folder. The Properties dialogue appears. The selected microwave links are set as active. select the fields that you want to display in the report. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management microwave links). Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links context menu: 1. click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder and rightclick the group of microwave links you want to set as active.

outage probabilities) are saved in the Atoll document. If geographic data maps have been updated. or multi-hops. For the first two reasons. A microwave link can be common to more than one multihop as well.e. if you added a new clutter class map). various losses. To recalculate the link budget for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. Atoll automatically detects invalidity of the calculation when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. 2. "Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 209. unavailability due to faults). Right-click the Links folder.3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis AtollMulti-hop microwave links.4 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity Link budget calculations performed for a group of microwave links (i. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double clicking the corresponding record in the report. Select Link Budgets > Calculate from the context menu.5. the following are explained: • • "Creating Multi-hops" on page 208 "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 210 7. Notes • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder. and recalculates the link budget. Atoll removes existing calculations. reception parameters (sensitivity. Atoll indicates the characteristics of the link (sites. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. It also details the propagation calculation (total attenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air). you can quickly perform a link budget for a group of links. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse" on page 209. and geo-climatic parameters. once calculations have been performed for all the links. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. 3..Atoll User Manual To perform link budget calculations on a group of microwave links: 1. "Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally" on page 210. In this section.). 7. are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a destination. the signal level received. various losses. b. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active" on page 210. calculation options. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets. including valid ones. To force Atoll to recalculate the link budget: 1. etc. and its quality and availability. you must force Atoll to recalculate.5. So.5. 208 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . unavailability due to rain. In this section. the following are explained: • • • • • "Creating a Multi-hop" on page 209. to construct a microwave connection over areas that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances. 3. 7. The context menu appears.). To recalculate the link budget for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. In the last case (e. The context menu appears. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Select Link Budgets > Force Calculations from the context menu. If microwave link properties have been modified.g. intermediate results such as propagation. a multi-hop is managed as a group of microwave links. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Atoll displays the link budget report. 2. microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes.. Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analysis over multi-hops. antennas and equipment installed).2. etc.1 Creating Multi-hops In Atoll. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.3. All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave link being studied. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. the fade margin. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP. In general practice.

The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically.5. d. Select Add a Link from the context menu. b. Assign links to the multi-hop: a. you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the Browse button ( Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop. 4. The Microwave Radio Links folder ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. The pointer shape changes to 3. 7. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll.1 Creating a Multi-hop To create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder: 1.1. 3. The Multi-hops folder opens. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link: Either a. c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 209 . Select a link from the Link column. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link.1. The pointer changes ( ). b. Right-click on the multi-hop link. - 6. 2.3. ). 5. 2. Once you have selected a multi-hops class.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link. The context menu appears.3 Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse To create a new multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. 7. The context menu appears. 4. The next microwave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the site parities). in the map window. Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. 10. Click OK. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. 11. 9. where "X" increments with each instance of a multi-hop link. By default. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. Select the Links tab. b. The context menu appears.1. but can be modified. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears. 8. Or a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. In the map. 2. Select New… from the context menu. Atoll creates an empty multi-hop link in the Multi-hops folder. Click on the map in each place you want to end a link and start a new link. 3. Click OK.2 Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse To add a microwave link to a multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. On the map.5. Atoll uses this information with the multi-hop length to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop. Atoll names the newly created multi-hop link in the following manner: "Multi-hopsX".3. The Multi-hops folder opens.3. Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link. Note: The Other Properties tab will appear if you have defined additional fields in the Multihops table. Click the Multi-hop button ( ) on the toolbar. Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. Click the Expand button ( opens.5. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop. 7. The Properties dialogue appears.

sub-band. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder.3.3. Right-click the multi-hop that you want to analyse. quality indicators (probabilities of SESR. Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outage ratio. BBER) compared to the required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faults and annual outage period. 4. 5. you can modify.3. 7. The interference can generate a fading (called reflective fading) that can lower down the received signal. ESR. Do one of the following: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link active. 7.5 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a multi-hop link. transmitters. In Atoll. Quality and availability analyses only take into account active microwave links and not inactive or filtered microwave links). ) to expand the Multi-Hops folder.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. Atollcalculates the reflection point using 2-Ray model.1. This calculation is based on the ITU-R 530-5/8/10 recommendations. Reception characteristics: reception thresholds. In the Explorer window. The End-to-End Analysis dialogue appears. Note: Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies.5. 7. 7. Expand the Multi-Hops folder by clicking the button 3. 2.Atoll User Manual The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites. total length of the multi-hop link. add. quality (percentage over a month). 210 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. channels. Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link inactive. To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link: 1. A reflected signal that can reach the receiver with enough strength and with a certain delay as compared to the direct signal can generate interference. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). Right-click the Multi-Hops folder. and polarisation of each transmitting site. 4. you can display reflection areas along the link profile and analyse the location of the reflection point and its impact on the received signal level. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. margins.5. are also supported in the calculation. and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. It contains the following information: Multi-hop link characteristics: the microwave links forming the multi-hop link. delete. The context menu appears. In this table. 2.5. Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band. The Multi-Hop Links table appears. To map multiple links to multi-hop links: 1. monthly and annual outage periods. and passive repeaters. Click the Expand button ( 3. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a multi-hop: 1. Select Mapping Between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu. 2.4 Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally Atoll allows you to map multiple microwave links to the multi-hop links . If no site exists. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Summary: Atoll indicates if quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link. Select Analysis from the context menu. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. 3. containing all the multi-hop links and their corresponding microwave links. availability (percentage over average year) and failures (percentage over year). Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you click. such as optic fibre links. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links.6 Studying Reflection Studying reflection is essential to designing any microwave link network. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the multi-hop link whose activity status you want to set.

see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151 Reflection point can have different locations as the k factor vary during the day. The context menu appears. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. Obstructed reflected signals are represented with orange dashed lines. The reflection does not create destructive interference. Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies: Select the Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies check box if you want to display the reflection zone regardless of clutter categories. it is not obstructed). select the Display tide levels check box in order to display the height variation due to tides above the sea water clutter category. the reflection analysis has to be performed for different k factor values.6. Display the reflection plan: Select the Display the reflection plan check box in order to display the reflection slope. Green: Either there is no reflection point. Under Display tide levels. 4. "Analysing Reflections" on page 212. 2. select the Reflection tab. For information on defining the range of k factor values. Interference can be destructive when the reflection point is located within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. The option is automatically selected after you have displayed reflections as explained in the paragraph above. Then. The reflection can create destructive interference. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. This one is used to determine the reflection point. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. Under For All Reflection Zones. Red: The reflection point is within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. 3. the reflected signal is not obstructed). see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Click one reflection area. you can select the following options: Display the specular reflection point: Select the Display the specular reflection point check box if you want to display reflection areas along the link profile and unobstructed reflected paths.e. The reflection zone is determined from antenna heights and ground altitude at the transmitter and receiver sites. In the Profile Display Options dialogue. - 6. Atolldisplays reflection areas and unobstructed reflected signals calculated for the first k factor value defined in the Profile tab. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 211 . Select Display Options from the context menu. it is not based on the defined clutter categories. you can select the following options: Display the reflections for the k factor range: Select the Display the reflections for the k factor range check box if you want to display unobstructed and obstructed reflected paths calculated for the defined range of k factor values. To display reflection areas: 1. Display the obstructed reflections: Select the Display the obstructed reflections check box if you want to display obstructed reflected signals. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. Orange: The reflection point is within the reflection area but the reflected signal is obstructed.1 Displaying Reflection Atoll displays reflection areas along the profile and provides information about the interference generated by the reflected signal.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes in the microwave propagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile. You can display additional information regarding reflected paths. Atollcolours the pattern and highlights the corresponding unobstructed reflected path if there is one. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. To display additional information: 1. "Solutions Against Reflections" on page 215. Reflection areas are represented with a hashed pattern and unobstructed reflected signals by orange lines. Right-click the Profile tab.e. 3. The reflection does not create destructive interference. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Therefore. Display all the paths: Select the Display all the paths check box if you want to display all possible reflected signals within the reflection area. or the reflection point is out of the reflection area. 2. For information on assigning clutter categorries to clutter classes in the propagation model properties. you have to check if this zone is a reflection area and in this case. - 7. For information on defining the range of k factor values. In this section. The colour indicates if the reflection can generate destructive interference. 5. if there is a reflection point within the reflection area. The context menu appears. For information on defining the height variation. 7. Under For the selected area. 4. Right-click the Profile tab.

6. Height: The site altitude. For more information on how the ground type is determined. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. Ground Type: It can be either scattering. or intermediate. Select Display Reflections from the context menu.Atoll User Manual Note: Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken microwave link profiles. the length of the link and the transmitter antenna height above the reflection area. or reflecting. To display a detailed analysis of reflection areas: 1.99% of the average year in millimetre per hour. Rainfall Rate (exceeded during 0.01% of the average year): The rainfall observed 99. 5. Coordinate System: The display coordinate system set in the . "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. Frequency Band: The operating frequency band selected in the microwave link properties. 2. Angle at A between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site A.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report Atoll provides detailed analysis of reflection areas and their impact on microwave links. Link Specifications: You will find data on the studied microwave link: Longitude: The site position on the x-axis. Water Vapour Density: The water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Earth Curvature Factor (k): The k factor defined in the Profile tab. Click a reflection area. "Water or very wet" is considered for wet terrains. The Report tab contains the following sections: Summary: The Summary part provides information on the impact of the reflection on the direct signal. It depends on the roughness. tree covered and cryosphere clutter categories. see the Technical Reference Guide. Relative Humidity: The relative humidity in %. Humidity Type: The humidity type depends on the clutter category.2. the profile should not include repeaters.6. it displays optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for the k factor defined in the Profile tab.. Geoclimatic factor (K): The K factor which models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. The context menu appears. Temparature: The average temperature (in °C) of the zone in which the microwave link operates. 4. Critical specular reflection point: This indicates if there is a reflection point for the selected reflection zone.2 Analysing Reflections In this section. Geoclimatic Parameters: You will find geoclimatic parameters defined for the studied microwave link: Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - - - Reflection area geometry: The Reflection area geometry part contains the following information: 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . "Slightly wet or moderatly dry" is used for rural open. Select the Report tab. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Terrain Roughness Factor: The terrain roughness factor. 6. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. 7. Total Reflection Area Length: The length of the selected reflection zone and the total length including all reflection zones into brackets. "Very dry" is considered for built-up area and dry ground clutter categories. Atoll recommends some solutions to minimise the reflection effects such as changing the receiver antenna tilt or implementing diversity techniques. "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. If required. Latitude: The site position on the y-axis.e. In addition. Right-click the reflection area. fresh and sea water clutter categories. Grazing angle of reflected ray: The grazing angle and the incidence angle of the reflected path on the reflection slope plane are complementary angles. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. 7. i. Right-click the Profile tab. The context menu appears. Effective Coefficient Reflection: The reflection coefficient of the reflection area. 7. 3.atl document. Length: The microwave link length.

Antennas: Main. ESR. Diversity Frequency: The second channel frequency when diversity frequency is used. The signal attenuation is due to the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and refractivity (Attenuation due to refractivity). <Field Selection>: The results listed after can be calculated for three k factor values (kmin. when configuring the report as explained in "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. BBER) to be considered for the link. Specular Reflection Factor: The specular reflection factor. Refractivity Gradient: The refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface (in N-units/km) as defined in the link properties. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. you can select the following information: - Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 213 . kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. and if the reflected and direct signals arrive in phase. Availability Objectives: The availability objectives (SESR. BBER) to be considered for the link. Polarisation: The antenna polarisation. diversity and back antenna properties for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB) and repeaters (SiteP and SiteQ). Total Attenuation: The total attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. you can select the following information: Detailed Study: You can read if the specular reflection point is within the reflection area. Conductivity: The terrain conductivity in S/m. <Custom Fields>: The custom fields available in Links table. Permitivity: The terrain permitivity. - - Additional results appear if. Attenuations: The Attenuations part contains the following results calculated for the k factor value defined in the Profile tab: Reflected Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. Climatic Factor: The geoclimatic factor as defined in the link properties. quality model. Direct Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the direct signal at the receiver side. the support type and custom fields. if the reflected signal is obstructed. The value is read in the Geoclimatic Parameters file. Quality Objectives: The quality objectives (SESR. availability model. you can select the following information: - - Calculation Parameters: Under Calculation Parameters. The value is calculated according to refractivity conditions defined for the link. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. Equipment: The equipment parameters for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB). Calculation Methods: The calculation methods used (propagation model. <Field Selection>: Atoll recommends optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for three k factor values (kmin. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. space diversity and frequency diversity). kavg and kmax). - Link Specifications: Under Link Specifications. Rain Height (0°C isotherm): The height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. kavg and kmax). Median Value of the k factor: the k factor value observed 50% of time. Sites: Sites related parameters such as the pylon height. you can select the following information: - - Geoclimatic Parameters: Under Geoclimatic Parameters. Environment Type: The terrain type as defined in the link properties. For information on configuring the channel to be studied. Fog: the fog intensity in %. This is the sum of the attenuation due to antenna discrimination and the attenuation due to ground reflection. Percentage of time when the refractivity gradient (<100m) is <-100N-units/km: The percentage of the average year where the refractivity gradient value of -100N-units/km is not exceeded. you select the corresponding check boxes: Summary: Under Summary. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. Atmospheric Pressure: The atmospheric pressure (hPa) as defined in the link properties. you can select the following information: - - Transmission: Under Transmission.9% of time. Effective Earth Curvature Factor (ke at 99. Terrain Profile: The terrain profile. Climatic Zone: The climatic zone as defined in the link properties. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. The signal is attenuated by the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and because it is reflected by the ground (Attenuation due to ground reflection). Terrain Irregularity: The terrain irregularity. Calculated Channel: The calculated channel. The value is defined in the link properties. ESR.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Angle at B between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site B. calculation on the diversity antenna. Maximum Possible Attenuation: The strongest attenuation experienced by the direct signal at the receiver side. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Surface Reflection Coefficient: The surface reflection factor.9%): the k factor value observed 99.

click the Reset button. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. 5. you can select the following information: 7. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. To define reflection analysis parameters: 1. Click the Actions button and select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. b. If the difference is lower than 1. The Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue appears. c. or Align Right. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. then there is no minimum (destructive interference at the receiver side due to the reflected signal) that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity can be avoided. 7. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Tau(kmax)-Tau(kmin): The difference between Tau calculated for kmax and Tau calculated for kmin.6. select the reflection area to be considered in the reflection analysis: 214 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .6. 2. Click OK. Tau corresponds to the difference in path length between direct and reflected signals expressed in wavelength. clear its check box. Reflection area geometry: Under Reflection area geometry.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report You can configure the display parameters of the reflection analysis report to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the reflection analysis. kavg and kmax). Click a style.Atoll User Manual Divergence Factor: The divergence factor. you can access and modify the global calculation parameters and the microwave link parameters. Click the Style tab. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue.2. Click the AaBbYyZz button to change the font. Under Analysis Mode. 2. To configure the reflection analysis report: 1. 4. The Report Configuration dialogue appears. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. a. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. 3. d. To hide a result. Zone Location: The distances from Site A at which the reflection area starts and ends. c. you can select the following information: - - Attenuations: Under Attenuations. select its check box. Path difference (direct/reflected) (m): The difference in path length between direct and reflected signals.2. Click the Actions button and select Configure Report. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. a. b. Click the Contents tab. Centred. Reflected path delay: The delay of the reflected path in ns. then there is at least one minimum that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity may be implemented depending on how well the signal is reflected and whether there is significant discrimination against surface reflections from one or both of the antennas. To restore the initial style. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Location of the specular reflection point: The distance of the specular reflection point from Site A. Select the paragraph alignment by selecting Align Left. d. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. select the Reset button. Antenna heights above the reflection plan: The antenna heights at SiteA and SiteB above the reflection plan. If the difference exceeds or equals 1. To display a result. In addition. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. kavg and kmax).

6. Click OK. for different k factor values (kmin. For more information on these calculation methods. 2. Atoll takes into account all reflection areas along the profile in the reflection analysis. Click the Actions button and select Calculation Parameters. By default. To access the global calculation parameters: 1. kmax and the kavg) and receiver antenna heights. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Click the Actions button and select Link Properties.6. To check the recommended antenna height and frequency separations: 1. select the method to be used to calculate terrain height irregularity. or by using diversity techniques with the antenna/frequency separations recommended in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. You can choose between the Root Mean Square method. kmax and the kavg) and transmission frequencies. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. Under Terrain Height Irregularity. Click a reflection area. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 215 . 9. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. Global Calculation on all reflection areas: If you select this option. 2. see the Technical Reference Guide. 2. 4. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. select the method to be used to calculate the indirect signal amplitude. You can also display the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path as a function of: The k factor. 8. 5. see the Technical Reference Guide. the attenuation of the reflected path compared to the direct path) as a function of the antenna height.3 Solutions Against Reflections At the end of the reflection analysis. The context menu appears. Atoll provides you with a tool you can use to check whether the recommended antenna height and frequency separations are valid over a range of k factor values. 5. for different k factor values (kmin. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with equivalent reflection coefficient. Under Effect due to tide level above sea water. for different receiver antenna heights and transmission frequencies. Under Antenna heights above the reflection plan. effects of reflections can be minimized by carefully positioning the antenna heights as explained in "Studying Reflection" on page 210. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212.e.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Calculation on the selected reflection area: If you select this option. see the Technical Reference Guide. For more information on these calculation methods. For more information on these calculation methods. 7. Under Refractivity. The transmission frequency. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. To access the microwave link parameters: 1. In this case. 6. You can also use it to optimise the height and frequency separations. select the range of k factor values: kmin Factor: the lowest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. 4. Atoll displays the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path (i. Atoll makes the reflection analysis on the selected reflection area. kmax Factor: the highest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. Right-click the Profile tab. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. you can identify whether ground reflection is a problem for the link. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with linear regression on the area. 3. Under Amplitude calculation of the indirect ray. select the method to be used to calculate antenna heights above the reflection plan. 7. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. select the Take into account height variations of check box and define the corresponding height. by using the antenna discrimination capabilities and tilting the receiver antenna as indicated in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. the Standard Deviation method and the Interdecile Range method.

4. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. Under Graph Selection. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab.7 Planning Microwave Link Channels Planning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. 3. 8. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. the k factor value not exceeded 99% of the average year) and the keff factor at 50% (i. define the transmission frequency values.e. to be considered for the analysis. kavg and kmax. 11. Diversity Frequency. Min Bound: The lower value on the horizontal axis. 2. Under Transmission Frequency Selection. Under k Factor Selection. you can select the following: Ordinate: Select what you want to display on the horizontal axis. the median k factor value). The optimal separations for the different k factor values are displayed. Click a reflection area. Select the Display tab. 9. kmin. frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only for interference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network. Diversity Antenna. then divide each plan into a high segment and a low segment. either select the Automatic Bound Calculation check box in order to let Atoll automatically determine the upper and lower values of the vertical axis. The context menu appears. A logical approach is to define a number of specific frequency plans. to be considered for the analysis. Click OK. 216 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Main Frequency and Other Frequency. The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the most important objective. For information.120: Study of Reflection and Diversity – Attenuation Graph 7. Under Receiver Antenna Height Selection. define the antenna height values. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity frequency (main frequency + separation) and the other frequency values (main frequency + 2*separation). the k factor and the transmission frequency. Main Antenna and Other Height. 9. Select the Variable Definition tab. The optimal separations calculated for the different k factor values are displayed. 10. 5.Atoll User Manual Figure 7.separation) and the other height (main antenna height + separation) values. Thus. 11. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. To optimise the antenna height and frequency separations: 1.e. Max Bound: The upper value on the horizontal axis. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity antenna height (main antenna height . 7. You can redo the analysis with these values. Right-click the Profile tab. there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. They are automatically calculated by Atoll. 10. For each new link created in any environment. Under Horizontal Axis. define the k factor values. select the graphs to be displayed and how you want to colour them. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations. Under Vertical Axis. 8. It is common experience that such modifications in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during the initial design of the same network. Atoll displays the keff factor at 99% (i. You can choose between the receiver antenna height. each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. Atoll 7. 6. or keep clear the Automatic Bound Calculation check box and define these values manually (Max Attenuation and Min Attenuation). to be considered for the analysis. Click OK.

2 Creating a Report on Site Parities Atoll enables you to create a report displaying site parities. Right-click the Links folder. 3. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. In this section. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Right-click the Links folder. 4. 6. the following are explained: • • "Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 217 "Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 217. The Channel Distribution table contains the following information. 8. filtered (i. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Once the site parities are displayed on the map. To create a report displaying site parities: 1. Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities. Select Interference and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Interference. You can also open the Channel Distribution dialogue using the toolbar by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button.7. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands.7. the following are explained: • • • • • "Checking Microwave Link Site Parities" on page 217. "Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 218.e. In this section. The context menu appears. 9. Atoll takes into consideration the sites of microwave links which are active. 2. 5. you can hide them by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button again. 7. that are selected by the current filter parameters). with each pair having minimum separations.1.1 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities You can verify the parity of sites either on the map or in a report. 2. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. Select Interference > Channels Distribution per Site > Display on the Map from the context menu. "Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search" on page 218. Click OK to start the calculations.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs. You can also hide the site parities using the context menu.1 Checking Site Parities on the Map Atoll enables you to view the site parities on the map and thereby detect any possible parity conflicts.. The context menu appears. Once Atoll has finished checking site parities. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table. "Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products" on page 220 7. To perform a site parity check and display the results on the map: 1. 4. 3. To hide the site parities using the context menu: 1. 7. the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa. the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments. Right-click the Links folder. ) ) 3. Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities. The context menu appears. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. 4. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. 7. When an assignment is made. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (in dpi). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 217 . Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Choose an icon for the different cases. and which intersect the computation zone. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend. 5. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu. If the transmitter frequency is in the high block. Click OK.1. "Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser" on page 219. Atoll checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands.7. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. 6.

e. Links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. 8. Select a Frequency Band. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. 2. Select a Sub-band. If you only want the selected Channel to be displayed. 2..7. links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. The Search Tool window provides you with the following options: To restore the initial microwave link colours: Click the Reset Display button in the window. 7. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band.7. 3. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. Links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. 4. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. 6.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search The semi-automatic channel search tool in Atoll ranks channels according to a definable cost function enabling you to find the best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. 7. Site B . Click the Conditions tab and define the following: Link Directions to Calculate: Select the check box of the directions of the link to be calculated (Site A Site B. Parity: The parity of the site. Links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue. To find a channel using the Search Tool: 1.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse In Atoll. If you only want the links with the selected frequency Sub-band to be considered. The Semi-Automatic Channel Search dialogue appears. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. If you selected the Same Sub-band Only check box. Click Search. All other links are displayed in grey. select the Same Sub-band Only check box. 9. Select Planning > Semi-automatic Search from the context menu. you can use the Search Tool to search for channels. To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link: 1. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box. links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. 218 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Search Tool window appears.Site A. The Search Tool allows you to view channel reuse on the map. 7. Click View > Search Tool. Select a Channel. links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue and all others are displayed in grey. Longitude: The longitude of the site.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band. This channel search is performed according to the interference received or transmitted per channel. You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. or both). Latitude: The latitude of the site. see "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green and all other links are displayed in grey. 5. Site: The name of the site. Links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. The context menu appears. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. 3. links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. To display all channel arrangements available for the selected frequency band: Click the Frequency Plans button and resize the Search Tool window by dragging the lower border of the window. Define in which half-band (Lower or Upper) you want to search for the channel. Select the MW Channel tab. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. Atoll gives the name of microwave links whose the site has a multiple parity. For more information.. Links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. select the Co-channel Only check box. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only.e.

121): Figure 7. You can locate the channels on which there is the least or no interference and allocate these "free" channels where required. Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered on the useful signal. The results window displays the list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. in terms of the related costs. Whether automatic transmission power control on interfering signals is to be considered always on. If there are more than one interfering signals. are the ones listed on top of the list. 4. or vertical. select Restrict the list of potential channels and define the channels available. You can enter or paste a list of channels. always off or taken into consideration according to geometric correlation. - The link polarisation to be considered in the calculation. It is then possible through this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by selecting the channels to assign and clicking the Commit button.7. Click the Parameters tab and define: The earth curvature factor (k factor). The red line shows the total noise level received on the interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Under Channels to Study: Frequency Sub-Band: Select the frequency sub-band from the list of available frequency sub-bands from to the frequency band of the microwave link being studied. Site A Half-Band: Select the frequency half-band to calculate (lower or upper) for the transmission site (the opposite half-band is assigned to the reception site). This implies that the best available channels. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 219 . entering 20-22 corresponds to entering 20 21and 22. Atoll calculates a cost for each channel and each defined polarisation (either horizontal. This tool calculates and draws a graph representing the channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band.4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser Atoll can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave link’s operating frequency band enabling you to allocate unused or less used channels where required. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites. Under Channel Weightings.121: The I Level on the Band tab . In order to take into account all the potential interferers. You can also enter a range of channels available. or a semi-colon. Through this graph. To open the spectrum analyser: 1. by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables Atoll to filter the interferers. 2. If only some channels of the frequency sub-band can be allocated.Received Interference Levels Option Atoll calculates the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the microwave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. Select Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu. For example. use the slider to define the weight given to the interferer and victim channels. or a space. 7. Click Calculate to launch the calculations. The minimum threshold degradation. The channels to be analysed: Select Use all the channels of the sub-band if all the channels can be allocated. Note: Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the peak signal value. The context menu appears. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. this is the percentage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. only the peak value is displayed on the graph. - 5. you can find the channels with least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links. or horizontal and vertical). set the parameter to 3000%. the values must be separated with either a comma.

The transmission frequencies used by the site. forming additional signals at frequencies that are not.The studied site..g.Site A. Atoll can calculate third-order intermodulation products. For information on displaying the third-order intermodulation products. Site A Site B or vice versa. and can therefore interfere with the desired behaviour. For information on global parameters. Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab.Site B or Site B if you selected Site B . For information on global parameters. They are important because they fall within the vicinity of the original frequency components.Site A) and calculates the third-order intermodulation products for each transmission channel of the frequency half-band of the microwave link. To calculate third-order intermodulation products: 1.A snapshot of the I Levels on the Band tab. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters. Actions > Report: Click Actions and then select Report from the menu in order to display a detailed report on the calculated intermodulation products. The report contains the following information: .e.e. Intermodulations: Select the Intermodulations option in order to display third-order intermodulation products. see “Global Parameters” on page 156. . or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. The signals of different frequencies are mixed together.. For information on displaying the received interference levels. Non-linear systems generate harmonics. in general. Atoll displays a tool tip when you place the mouse cursor on each vertical line. Received interference levels: Select the Received interference levels option in order to display channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. i. f1). 2f1. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. 3f1. Frequencies are represented by vertical lines and reported on the horizontal axis. 4f1..7. Select Planning and Intermodulation Products from the context menu.Site B or Site B if you selected Site B .Intermodulations Option Atoll shows the transmission and reception frequencies used by the studied site (i. 5f1.The reception frequencies used by the site. - - 220 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . see “Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser” on page 219. Site A if you selected Site A .. . The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. Site A if you selected Site A . at harmonic frequencies of either.e. . Intermodulation occurs when the input to a non-linear system is composed of two or more frequencies.. etc..e.e. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link.122: The I Level on the Band tab . i. These new frequencies are called intermodulation products (IMPs).). then the output is a signal which includes a number of integer multiples of the input frequency (i. - - 7. Only frequenies within the frequency band of the studied microwave link are represented. 2.The studied microwave link and the selected hop. green lines show the frequencies used for reception and red lines represent the third-order intermodulation products. see “Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products” on page 220. . meaning that if the input of a non-linear system is a signal of a single frequency (e.5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products Intermodulation is caused by non-linear behaviour of the signal processing being used. i.The third-order intermodulation products belonging to the studied frequency band. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters. . see “Global Parameters” on page 156.Atoll User Manual You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied.122): Figure 7. Site A Site B or vice versa. The blue lines indicate the frequencies used for transmission. The context menu appears.

When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment. However.8. filtered (i. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph..1 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab.. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table.8. "Displaying Interference on the Map" on page 226. You can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. "Managing Interference Calculation Validity" on page 226. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. and intersect the computation zone. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference.e. When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link. and receiver mask graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs. Atoll uses it. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. "Using IRF in Interference Calculations" on page 224. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Atoll calculates all the microwave links in the group that are active. The context menu appears. or modulation are not the same. Otherwise. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). capacity.1 Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 221 .e. or the theoretical graphs if not. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. In this section. By default. you can change the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available on the Modules tab. 7. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating frequency band of the microwave link being studied. The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. The following parameters are taken into account when calculating interference: • • • • • Interferer ATPC can be user-defined as always on. 2. IRFs defined on the IRF table if available T/I curve. Co-channel and adjacent channel interference. 7. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. In this section. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 221 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 222. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. transmitter mask. If so. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. For information on the computation zone. 7. Potential interferers. If so. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. capacity and modulation. among all microwave links in the network. 2. i. that are selected by the current filter parameters). always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. "Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links" on page 225. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Interference calculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any user-defined group of links. the interference in Atoll are calculated according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available.1. Atoll also considers the adjacency of frequency bands. are the active and filtered microwave links whose transmitter – receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation zone and whose interfering transmitter – interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224. received interferer signal threshold and geo-climatic correlation factor between links. Polarisation and equipment signatures. Atoll searches for potential interferers in the network operating in the same frequency band.8 Analysing Interference Atoll includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommendations. If the equipment manufacturer. Right-click on the Links folder.

2 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue.123: IRF table 5.123). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list. The context menu appears. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. 4. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. Figure 7.124: IRF record Properties dialogue 8. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. Click OK. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference.123). The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 7. 9. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band.Atoll User Manual 4. 6. Figure 7. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 7. 222 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .124). The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue.1. Right-click on the Links folder. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 7. 7. 2. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3.8. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).

c. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. Select Add Record from the context menu. The context menu appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 223 . Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. A dialogue appears. delete an IRF graph. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. 7. Select Delete from the context menu. b.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. The context menu appears. 6.125: IRF Setting dialogue 5. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Click OK. b. Under Enter graph values. You can now define an IRF graph. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. The context menu appears. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. d. 8. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. b.

and view the interference connections between the microwave link extremities being studied and their interferers and victims respectively. shielding losses. 224 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. . locations. port connection losses and waveguides and cable losses. gains. repeaters (if any). the channel. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antennas details such as the models. and altitudes for both extremities. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. Under Transmitter Filter. 7. . . capacity or modulation are not the same. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to calculate the IRF graph. quality model. transmitter powers.reception equipment pair in the IRF table. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment. Finally. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment.Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation.8. ATPC effects. capacities and configurations.8. visualise the results in the form of reports and tables. .Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). connection losses. It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer.Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. A dialogue containing details of the interference analysis appears.Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. f. e. gains and diameters. climatic factor. its operating frequency band. Atoll first checks if an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment . water vapour density. Else. heights. minimal channel bandwidths. Select Planning >Interference Details from the context menu. digital hierarchy employed. connection losses. total losses comprising filter losses. 9. or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not. The results are displayed in the following tabs: Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interference over any given microwave link. rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time). You can easily define the parameters for studying each microwave link. azimuths. 2. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. passive repeater gains (if any). If the equipment manufacturer. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. The context menu appears. azimuths. and waveguides and cable losses. . . temperature. shared losses. To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link: 1. whether it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. the transmission and reception port numbers.2 Using IRF in Interference Calculations As explained in "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. capacity and modulation. it uses it. It proceeds as follows: 1. overflow thresholds. The report includes the following information: . shielding losses. or the theoretical graphs if not. Atoll uses T/I curves in order to calculate the IRF graph. and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). Click OK. tilts. average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values.Atoll User Manual c.Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. thermal fade margin. 7. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. In this case. heights. g. thermal noise thresholds.Summary: A summary of the link being studied. port connection losses. 2. earth curvature factor (k). data rates. worst month quality. the corresponding frequency. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. the polarisation. a global link estimation taking into account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year. shared losses. antennas used at both sites with their respective models. modulation used. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. polarisation at both sites.3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link Atoll enables you to carry out interference studies on any microwave link of the network. site names. PL percentage. tilts. the IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the interference calculation. availability model. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. If defined. Under Reception Filter. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising of filter losses. diameters and near fields. length. d. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. the port circulator and attenuator losses.Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP.

epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). and availability objectives (SESR. quality objectives (SESR. antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Unavailability due to failures: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management interference. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. These results include the outage probability. selective fading. the following are explained: • • "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207. for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. details for the average year (rain fading. 4. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207. These results include availability of hot standby. fading due to discrimination reduction). To select a field to be included in the report. These results include the outage probability. the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. you can define the content of the interference report. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both directions. minimum threshold degradation. losses due to water vapour. rain attenuation.4. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is not considered in the total attenuation). Propagation: The nominal received signal level. BBER (required)). whether enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. Interference: Calculation parameters taken into consideration for the interference study (power control. To define the content of the interference report: 1.8. ESR (required). total interference in rain and C/I). select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. Right-click the Links folder. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation.1 Defining the Content of the Interference Report Before calculating interference on multiple microwave links. Select Interference > Properties from the context menu. total interference in clear-air. Interference Details: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied and the microwave links interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied. ESR (required). space diversity and frequency diversity). threshold degradation for rain. the outage probability. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. 7. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. if space and frequency diversities are used. interfered useful bandwidth) and results of interference calculations over the microwave link (threshold degradation. - - - - - - - Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. maximum distance. 7. 2. In the Field Selection dialogue. enhancement forecast).4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate interference for a group of microwave links simultaneously or over the entire network of microwave links. In this section. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. ESR. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. ESR. The Field Selection dialogue appears. correlation area. Interference results are displayed in the form of a report whose the content you can define. BBER). The context menu appears. Define the content of the report: a. To change the order of the fields. losses due to dry air. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. from top to bottom. BBER (required)). The Properties dialogue appears. the outage probability. outage probability due to failures for the average year. BBER). select the fields that you want to display in the report. free space loss. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. Click Add. nominal received carrier power level. 3. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report.8. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. fadings due to discrimination reduction. diffraction losses. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 225 . b. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month.

Notes: • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. To force Atoll to recalculate interference: 1. Atoll automatically detects the calculation invalidity when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. you can display the result on the map. You can also perform interference analysis over the entire network of microwave links. Click the microwave link on the map.g. In the last case (e. Click the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) in the toolbar. 7.Atoll User Manual c. The details are displayed in a detailed interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224.6 Displaying Interference on the Map After calculating interference on a microwave link. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Atoll removes existing calculations. b. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to recalculate interference. once calculations have been performed for all the links.8. Atoll removes existing calculations. including valid ones. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. The next time you configure an interference report. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Atoll displays the interference report.4.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links You can Atoll to calculate interference levels for a group of microwave links. performed on a group of microwave links. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. 7. 3. if you added a new clutter class map). To recalculate interference for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. including valid ones. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder. So. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double-clicking the corresponding record in the Victim/Interferer tabs.. 1. Select Interference > Calculate from the context menu. If geographic data maps have been updated. and recalculates interference. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. 5. The context menu appears. To display interference connections on the map 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. To recalculate interference for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. For the first two reasons. You can view details of each microwave link.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity Interference calculations. Select Interference > Force Calculations from the context menu. Click OK. 3. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. © Forsk 2010 226 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited . The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder.8. you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a group of links. You can also reset existing calculations and not recalculate interference afterwards by selecting the Interference > Reinitialise. 2. 7. by double-clicking the record in the report.8. you must force Atoll to recalculate. The context menu appears. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. are saved in the Atoll document. If microwave link properties have been modified.

Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the Links folder. 5. 2. 3. "Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse" on page 231 7. transmitters. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link In Atoll. Click the map at each place you want to insert a new link. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active" on page 229. The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and select if you want to make them visible. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.9 7. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • "Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 227. The pointer changes to ( ). 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. The Interference dialogue opens. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. In this section. or editing the point-to-multipoint links table. and passive repeaters. 4. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub" on page 230. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. Atoll displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards and outwards pointing arrows respectively. To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse: 1.1. 3. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 4.9. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link. You can hide them by clicking the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) again.9. "Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties" on page 228. a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which can contain repeaters) connected to a hub. When the interference connections are displayed on the map. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 229. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwave links must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites. you can use the tool tip to show further information about each interference connection by placing the cursor on it. To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder: 1. You can create a point-to-multipoint link in several different ways: • • • using the mouse. using the point-to-multipoint link folder. 2. If you do not click an existing site. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230. "Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally" on page 229.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed on the map. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ). 7. Atoll creates a new site where you click. 3. 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 227 . Once you have selected a frequency band. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neither interfering with the link nor being interfered by it. You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map. created automatically at the location you clicked on the map. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears. The context menu appears. 1. Select New from the context menu. Click the New PMP button ( ) on the toolbar. "Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. but can be modified.1 Advanced Configuration Point-to-Multipoint Links A point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub.

Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Atoll names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX".2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties You can modify point-to-multipoint link properties either individually or globally. 7.9. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. and filter tools. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. 6. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. of the point-to-multipoint table. The context menu appears.1. 4. 5. labels on the map. including user-defined fields. . see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230. Click OK.9. Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents. The context menu appears. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link: On the Data tab of the Explorer window: a.1 Modifying Global Properties To manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally: 1. The following fields must be filled: Name.2. Once you have selected the hub site. By default. Click OK.2 Modifying Individual Properties To edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. and Site. b. Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters. 228 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 6. 7. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears. The Point to Multipoint table appears. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens. 7. 3. Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link. Click the c. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit.2. enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. Select Open Table from the context menu. Atoll creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder. sort. 2. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. where "X" increments with the creation of each new point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ). ). Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their attributes.1. 2. see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230 To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint table: 1. and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool 6. 5. A global setting is applied to all the filtered point-to-multipoint links. 4. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( Type: Select the type: TDMA or FDMA.1. You can also organise point-to-multipoint links by using Atoll’s group. the following are explained: • • "Modifying Global Properties" on page 228 "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 228. In this section. Frequency Band.9. to manage the legend. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. d.Atoll User Manual Nodal Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link.

select a link. 4. An Other Properties tab is available if you have added fields to the Point-to-Multipoint table. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. 2. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. sort. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ).4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally To map microwave links to point-to-multipoint links globally: 1.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( 3. Deactivate Links: Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link inactive. Right-click the new point-to-multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu. The point-tomultipoint icon changes ( Note: ). For information on creating links. The Properties dialogue appears. ) to expand the Point to Multipoint folder. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. You can also organise multi-hops by using Atoll’s group. 2. In the Explorer window. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link. 7.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a point-to-multipoint link. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. containing all the pointto-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links. 6. Right-click the PMP hub whose activity status you want to set.9. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. delete. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change. Click OK. Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on the map. edit.1. 2. Select one of the following: Activate Links: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link active. Do not select the site icon ( ). In this table. 3. In the row with the new row icon ( ). 7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 229 . active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder.9. you can modify. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon. Select the Links tab. Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management On the map: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.9. b. The PMP/Link Mapping table opens. 7. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.1. Click the Expand button ( 3. 2. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. and filter tools. Select Properties from the context menu. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link: 1. 7. Links: The Links tab lets you add. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. and delete microwave links. 4. 5. 3. and add the links that make up a point-to-multipoint link.1. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder.

4. Click the Expand button ( 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click the Expand button ( c. When selecting a point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. However. Consequently. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link. the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. other factors such as the addition of new microwave links may mean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub When a microwave link consists of only two sites. click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. 2. In a pointto-multipoint link. 2. Do not select the site icon ( ). For information on creating links. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete: Either a. the height. The context menu appears. On the map.1.9. select the microwave link you want to delete. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select Add a Link from the context menu. 7. Note: Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters related to that site. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. Deleting a point-to-multipoint link from the table does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site. To make Atoll recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. 3. The context menu appears. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted. Select Delete from the context menu. The context menu appears. 230 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The context menu appears. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.9. Atoll can recalculate the settings for the point-tomultipoint hub antenna. 6. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. azimuth. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. On the map. d.9. 2. Click the Expand button ( 3. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. be careful to select the line representing the point-to-multipoint link.1. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse: 1. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. 2. The pointer shape changes ( ).9. 5. The context menu appears. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link: 1.Atoll User Manual 7.1. after the point-to-multipoint has been created.1. Select Delete from the context menu. The microwave link is deleted.6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a point-to-multipoint link: 1. You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Point-to-Multipoint table. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. On the map. 4. b. Atoll calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created. 7. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link. 7. b. Or a.

10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse To use the mouse to adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. The Properties dialogue appears. When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated. azimuth. ) and you can © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 231 . 2. the point-to-multipoint link antennas may need to be adjusted accordingly.9. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. A dialogue appears with the recalculated height.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 5. Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas. In the "Antenna" subsection. and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna. 6. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. Click the antenna icon (the point changes: ) and rotate it to its new azimuth.1. select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box. If you want Atoll calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hub antenna on the link antennas. 8. click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field. 7. 9. 7. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( now rotate it manually. Select Properties from the context menu.

Atoll User Manual 232 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

displaying for microwave links 194 column headers formatting 45 columns changing width 45 displaying 46 freezing 46 hiding 46 moving 46 © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 233 . creating 123 point-to-multipoint link. displaying using focus zone 31 report. assistant (MW) 139. adjusting 230 point-to-multipoint link.Index Index A antenna antenna patterns. adjusting with the mouse 231 single antenna patterns. creating from 30 Connection Properties 85 context menu 17 renaming objects 17 coordinate system 81 setting 82 coordinates. adjusting (MW) 200 heights. 132 changing relative position on the map 20 compatibility with equipment (MW) 138. calculating for 204 C cables creating (MW) 137 microwave 137 channel search. displaying using hot spot zone 31 coverage predictions restricting sites studied (MW) 192 cursors 40 CW Measurement Analysis Tool printing data 56 D Data tab 15 data tables adding a field 42 changing column width 45 changing row height 45 copying data 47 deleting a field 43 displaying columns 46 editing 43 exporting data 49 filtering 60 filtering by selection 62 filtering by several criteria 63 filtering. 139 compatibility with equipment. defining 33 report. editing (MW) 125 archiving all modifications to the database 87 only site data to the database 87 automatic backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 availability objectives microwave links. adjusting automatically (MW) 200 heights. importing (MW) 125. semi-automatic (MW) 218 clearance. examples 64 formatting column headers 45 formatting table columns 45 freezing columns 46 hiding columns 46 importing data 50 moving columns 46 opening 41 opening record properties from table 44 pasting data 47 printing 52 restoring after filtering 64 sorting 60 B backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 BER graphs creating (MW) 136 budget configuring report (MW) 206 multiple microwave links. defining 156 unfreezing 46 computation zone drawing 30 editing 34 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. optimising (MW) 200 microwave 123 microwave antenna properties 125 microwave. calculating for 206. 140 heights. copying (MW) 126 antenna patterns. searching by 73 coverage prediction exporting results 37 geogrphic export zone. 225 single microwave link. printing (MW) 126 antennas.

using for 69 transmitter list. exporting to 51 XML files. 57 by several properties 58 examples 59 with subfolders 71 F field adding to a table 42 deleting from a table 43 filter site list. 71 with subfolders 71 filtering zone deleting 33 drawing 29 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon.Atoll User Manual sorting by one column 61 sorting by several columns 61 unfreezing columns 46 viewing properties 42 XML files. 139 compatibility with antennas. creating from 30 Find toolbar 72 focus zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 polygon. 140 importing (MW) 132 transceiver. value intervals 22 display coordinate system 81 Distance Measurement tool 28 document creating from database 79. see "templates" DTM maps representing different areas 111 data tables by several criteria 63 examples 64 restoring after filtering 64 using a polygon 29. 80 geographic data 79 information needed to create 79 microwave data 79 microwave equipment 79 refreshing from the database 86 setting basic parameters 81 document templates. importing from 52 database archiving all modifications 87 archiving only site data 87 connecting to 84 Connection Properties 85 creating a document from 84 refreshing document 86 resolving data conflicts 88 working with 83 digital hierarchy 132 display changing properties 21 defining display type 22 display type. assistant (MW) 139. creating from 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 folder configuration 69 applying a saved configuration 70 creating 70 deleting 71 exporting 70 importing 70 reapplying current configuration 70 frequency bands long-haul (MW) 145 medium-haul (MW) 146 microwave 146 short-haul (MW) 146 frequency planning (MW) 216 frequency sub-bands microwave 147 E equipment compatibility with antennas (MW) 138. 84 creating from template 79. properties of (MW) 131 Explorer window 15 Data tab 15 Geo tab 15 layers 16 Modules tab 15 using tabs 15 G Geo tab 15 geographic export zone creating 33 Fit to Map Window 34 importing 34 polygon. unique 22 display type. using for 69 filtering data tables by selection 62 H hot spot zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 234 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . creating from 34 grouping 56 by a property 56. discrete values 22 display type.

defining 155 reliability analysis 203 required margins. calculating for multiple links 206. modifying 154 clearance. optimising 200 antenna patterns. mapping links to 229 profile analysis 193 quality objectives. 179 microwave ITU-R P. see point-to-multipoint links Location Finder searching by coordinates 73 searching by text property 73 long-haul frequency bands (MW) 145 M manufacturers (MW) 123 map centring on a selected object 28 exporting as image 40 measuring distances 28 moving 27 printing 52 refreshing display 72 saving as image 39 Map toolbar 74 measurement units. 225 budget. 132 availability objectives. calculating 204 restricting sites studied 192 semi-automatic channel search 218 simple link. 221 LOS between sites. creating 208 passive repeater 201 passive repeater.Index I interference analysis several links (MW) 226 single link (MW) 224 interference analysis (MW) 221 interference reduction factor table (MW) 134.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 multi-hop links. creating 137 calculation parameters 156 calculation parameters. creating 190 simple link. editing 125 site parity 217 site parity. 140 interference reduction factor (MW) 133. importing 132 error performance events 155 error performance objectives 155 error performance parameters 155 finding by site 58 frequency bands 146 frequency planning 216 frequency sub-bands 147 global properties. creating a report on 217 site parity. point-to-multipoint. 221 IRF. 214 classes. defining 156 grouping by site 58 interference analysis 221 interference on a single link. copying 126 antenna patterns. displaying 194 equipment. adjusting 200 antenna heights. intersection 184 LOS between sites. analysing 226 interference reduction factor 133. 139. modifying 205. calculating for single link 204 budget. see "interference reduction factor" L label 23 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 layers 16 legend adding object type 24 displaying 24 displaying Legend window 29 printing Legend window 56 line of sight area intersection of areas (MW) 184 studying (MW) 176. setting 82 measuring distances on the map 28 medium-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 microwave error performance events 155 microwave error performance objectives 155 microwave error performance parameters 155 Microwave Link Analysis printing 56 Microwave Link toolbar 75 microwave links 173 antenna heights. creating 123 antennas. 178. mapping simple links to 210 multi-hop. printing 126 © Forsk 2010 antenna properties 125 antenna/equipment compatibility 138. analysing 224 interference on several links. inserting (MW) 203 performance objectives 154 point-to-multipoint link 227 point-to-multipoint links. 178. defining 156 budget. studying 176. adjusting automatically 200 antenna heights. setting as active 206 simple links 185 single antenna patterns. importing 125. 139 antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 139. 140 antennas 123 antennas. 179 line of sight area (MW) 176 lines editing 34 link. displaying on the map 217 sorting by site 58 spectrum analyser 219 studying LOS between sites 176 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 235 . creating 154 classes. 221 using assistant (MW) 135. configuring report 206 cables 137 cables.

creating 137 workflow 173 Microwave Propagation Model defining parameters 151. 27 passive microwave repeaters creating 202 performance objectives microwave links 154 Point Analysis window printing 56 points editing 34 point-to-multipoint link adding a link 229. using as 54 using as computation zone 30 using as filter 29. modifying 191 template. adding on the map 230 links. examples 59 hiding 16 label 23 tip text 24 visibility scale 23 P Page Setup. 153 properties changing display 21 grouping objects by 56. creating 132 waveguides 137 waveguides. properties of 131 trunk types. 153 microwave radio links template 79 Modules tab 15 multi-hop links 208 adding links to 209 creating 208 links. adjusting 230 antenna. mapping to 210 reliability analysis 210 multipoint link. deleting 191 transceiver equipment. studying (MW) 210 Values tab (MW) 196 viewing (MW) 193 profile values exporting data 199 importing data 199 projection coordinate system 81 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 propagation model microwave ITU-R P. 230 creating 227 mapping links 229 properties 228 point-to-multipoint links 227 adding links 229 antenna. 71 using as filtering zone 30 printing antenna patterns (MW) 126 CW Measurement Analysis Tool 56 data tables and reports 52 defining print layout 54 docking windows 56 Legend window 56 map 52 Microwave Link Analysis 56 Point Analysis window 56 print preview 55 profile analysis (MW) 195 recommendations 53 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 56 printing zone drawing 53 Fit to Map Window 54 importing 54 polygon. deleting 191 template field. adjusting with the mouse 231 creating 227 deleting 230 deleting a link from 230 global properties 228 links. defining parameters 151. mapping to 229 properties 228 polygon deleting polygon filter 33 drawing a polygon filter 29 editing 34 focus zone. using as 34 printing zone. see "printing" Panoramic window 14.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 Microwave Propagation Model. adding 191 template field. creating from 54 profile analysis microwave 193 options (MW) 194 printing (MW) 195 reflections. see point-to-multipoint link multi-user environment 83 O objects changing transparency 23 deleting 17 displaying 16 displaying properties 18 grouping 56 grouping by a property 56. using as 31 geographic export zone. 57 grouping by several properties 58 grouping. 57 switching between property dialogues 18 236 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual template field.

using as 69 site parity. choosing 27 Search toolbar 75 searching for map objects 72. see "data tables" templates 79 deleting (MW) 191 field. microwave link 217 creating a report 217 displaying on the map 217 sorting sorting tables by one column 61 sorting tables by several columns 61 with subfolders 71 spectrum analyser (MW) 219 Standard toolbar 74 station template creating (MW) 191 modifying (MW) 191 subfolders creating 71 U undo 72 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 user configuration 66 creating 67 exporting 67 importing 67 V Vector Edition toolbar 75 visibility scale 23 W waveguides creating (MW) 137 waveguides and cables. 73 short-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 site moving on the map 19 moving to a higher location 19 properties. defining 155 T table columns formatting 45 tables.Index Q quality objectives microwave links. changing 23 trunk types. modifying (MW) 191 microwave radio links 79 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool printing 56 tip text 24 tool tips. microwave 137 windows cascading 14 docking 14 floating 14 X XML © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 237 . accessing from the Explorer window 18 properties. deleting (MW) 191 field. calculating (MW) 204 row height changing 45 rulers displaying 28 S scale level. microwave creating 132 R redo 72 reflection analysis report display (MW) 214 reflections studying (MW) 210 refresh 72 from the database 86 reliability analysis (MW) 203 renaming 17 default object names 17 repeaters passive repeater (MW) 201 passive repeater. see "tip text" toolbar icons 74 Map 74 Microwave Link 75 Search 75 Standard 74 Vector Edition 75 transceiver equipment properties of (MW) 131 transmitter list 67 adding 68 adding transmitter 68 creating 68 editing 69 editing filter 69 transparency. inserting (MW) 203 reports printing 52 required margins. accessing from the map 18 site list 67 adding 68 adding site 68 creating 68 editing 69 filter. adding (MW) 191 field. microwave creating 137 waveguides.

Atoll User Manual exporting data tables to 51 importing data tables from 52 Z zooming choosing a scale 27 in on a specific area 27 238 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 239 .

West Tower.USA Tel: +1 312 674 4846 Fax: +1 312 674 4847  China Office Suite 302. P. R. Guangzhou.com . 3/F.3 AT283_UMM_E2 December 2010  Head Office 7. IL 60606 . of China Tel: +86 20 8553 8938 Fax: +86 20 8553 8285 www.Suite 3100 Chicago.8. rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac .forsk. Jiadu Commercial Building.User Manual Microwave Links version 2. 510665. No. 66 Jianzhong Road. Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone.France Tel: +33 562 747 210 Fax: +33 562 747 211  US Office 200 South Wacker Drive .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful